Superhumanisms: Stapledon among the Supermen
One word, five rival doctrines of the more-than-human — and the lecturer whose creed reversed the career of the ethical movement’s enemy-word.
What this document is. An analytical essay by the reconstruction project’s editors — not a text by Stapledon. It is the project’s third monograph, and its first comparative one: the 1934 lecture’s “superhumanism” read against the rival doctrines of the superhuman that surrounded it — the bred superman, the ethical movement’s man-worship, the Life Force, the engineers’ self-transcendence, the literary supermen, the emergent and loving Gods of the professional metaphysicians, and the modern movement that inherited the subject and lost the word. It presupposes, and constantly cross-links, the analysis of the 1934 lecture (which owns the movement-by-movement reading and the genealogy inside Stapledon’s own work) and the 1946 monograph (which owns the Conway Hall return); neither is repeated here. Quotations from Stapledon’s manuscripts are taken from the verified consensus transcription (lectures/transcriptions_v2/consensus_v2/); quotations from every other text are taken from the sources held in corpus/ and carry verified links — each was located in the held text at build time and expands to the passage in context. Claims about who read whom are tiered explicitly, every time: documented reception (he read it, or it read him, on the record), documented engagement (named, quoted or reviewed in the held record), independent convergence (no contact possible or none documented — the parallel is real, the influence claim is not made), and comparison (ours alone). Interpretive claims beyond the quoted evidence are the editors’ own and are hedged as such. First edition, August 2026.
1. The enemy-word made creed
In September 1887 a young American, Stanton Coit, delivered the discourses that won him the ministry of South Place — the freethinking chapel off Finsbury that would shortly rename itself, at his insistence, an Ethical Society. The movement’s own documentary history preserves what he preached. Hold up “the Christian’s ideal of a loving God,” Coit told the congregation, and “you will see that it is in outline the perfect human character projected outward… a vision which the human soul throws out from its own depths”; and since the projection has no other existence, “We must make it a reality, else it has no existence.” The moral law survives the demotion of its God — “Duty is a jealous God” — and one doctrine above all is marked for destruction:
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 372 · ¶ 373 — quoted passages in context
'* Ethical Culture, as a religion for the people, offers in the place of God’s vigilance an adequate increase of men’s vigilance, in the place of a presence believed in, a presence actually seen and felt and heard — men and women looking and hearing, preventing, warning, condemning, rescuing. The dread of being caught hy one’s fellow-men offers, I believe, the strongest check that can be found to one’s evil impulses. The possibility of incurring the contempt even of strangers, holds us back from our sweetest transgressions; and the thought of the merest chance of being found out by those who respect us and love us tenderly, cuts into the soul like a knife, it spreads sharp pain through the finest pleasure, so that we recoil from our fondest schemes.” (p. 152.) — “ Next to the fear of being caught in evil-doing, the motive most powerful foi good over the minds of ordinary men, and especially of the poor and illiterate, is the desire for personal approbation when they have done well, and the fear of offending and disappointing someone who cares for them. This longing for personal fellowship in the inner moral life is, I believe, the deepest need of the human heart.” (p. 153.)—” Friends, if you hold up the Christian’s ideal of a loving God in the strongest light of your moral insight, you will see that it is in outline the perfect human character projected outward, that it is a vision which the human soul throws out from its own depths upon the clear blue sky of inward meditation. No sadder error has ever been committed than to mistake it for a reality and rest in the sight of it. We must make it a reality, else it has no existence. . . . But because we do not mistake it for a real existence, but regard it as a thing to be made real in our lives and in society, we maintain that ethical culture in this respect is better fitted than theistic religion to bring religion to the people.” (p. 157.)—” It is one thing to say as atheistic ethics docs ; ‘ There is no personal G^, therefore let us take up with the next best thing, and love our fellow-men’; and quite another — as different as day from night — to say:
‘ The highest thing is to love where there is the greatest need. . . . Because fellowship with living men bears upon it the sovereign seal of the moral sanction, therefore will I know no oAcr fellowship until that be perfected.* ” (p. 162.)^” Duty is a jealous God. . . . ‘ What, am I not the highest.? * says the voice of Duty, ‘ Thinkest thou that if the veil were rent and diou stoodest face to face with what is now the mystery of being, thou shouldst find it fairer than I am? Then hast thou never known me*.” (p. 162.) — “If we do not base ethics on atheism, or theism, or agnosticism, or positivism, what
“The doctrine that our Moral impulses… are injected upon supplication to a superhuman being for help, is so palpably false and degrading that it should be silenced.”
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 376 — quoted passage in context
which awakens contemplation, we set before men the vision of a glorified earth. Stung by its splendours, men will leap to create it. It was always the glorified earth that the heart of man longed for. It was only as the hopes of our realising it faded away that the vision of another world began to shed its strange unnatural light over this earthly existence.” (pp. 167-168!;— ” Ethical Culture is a religion for the illiterate, because it intends and hopes to do away with illiteracy altogether; it sees that illiteracy ought not to be; furthermore, it is demonstrating that it need not be.” (p. 169.)— ‘‘The doctrine that our Moral impulses do not well up out of our own nature, but arc injected upon supplication to a superhuman being for help, is so palpably false and degrading that it should be silenced. . . . The power to do right is a part of ourselves. It is as much a part of ourselves at least as the power to think, to see or to eat, and there is no more need to ask some superhuman being for it than for these. There is only need of exercising it, no matter how weak it may be.” (p. 170.) — ‘‘What, then, have we to offer? To the neglected, a friend; to those in moral danger, a guard; to the weak, encouragement; to the erring, self-respect; to the ignorant, knowledge; and unto the sorrowing, an inward joy.” (p. 171.) — (Last paragraph.) ‘‘The light which streams from conscience bathes in opal beauty every individual life; it penetrates and makes radiant with the splendour of pure joy every family on earth; the city where it gleams has no need of the sun, neither oi the moon; blessed too are the nations that walk in the light of it. The warmth of its beams reaches to the uttermost limits of mankind; yea, it floods the universe with its effulgence inexhaustible. We behold a glory in the sea and sky, and on the distant mountains, which is not their own. We lose ourselves in light. Such is the poetry of the moral life. Such is the gospel of ethics.” (p. 174.)
That is the word this monograph follows. In Gustav Spiller’s The Ethical Movement in Great Britain — the organized movement’s history of itself, compiled from its own minute-books and printed in 1934 — “superhuman” occurs in exactly two passages, and both times it is the enemy: Coit’s re-founding sermon, and the Moral Instruction League’s petition against school religion that makes “appeal to supernatural or superhuman motives.” (The wider word-family adds one record on neutral terms, and the count is honest only with it stated: among the Ethical Church’s Dinner-Hour Services Spiller lists a McCabe address titled “The Travail for the Superman” — a title only, its attitude unrecoverable; the exact token “superhuman,” though, is hostile both times it appears.) Coit’s own major book, National Idealism and a State Church (1907), uses it the same way: the taste for spontaneity in religion “can only arise in a preference for the superhuman, which casts discredit upon and paralyses the efficiency of the human,” and the coming religion is one “which wholly discards trust in superhuman agencies as the source of moral inspiration”; “If prayer be but a petition to superhuman agencies, we have had enough of it.” Meanwhile “humanism” was becoming the movement’s proud self-name — Coit’s chapters on “the humanist party in England,” the movement’s paper ending its days as The Humanist. For the organized ethical movement of 1887–1934, the superhuman was what you outgrew; the human was what you worshipped.
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 2830 · ¶ 2804 · ¶ 13 — quoted passages in context
“ The statement having been frequently made at public meetings and circulated in the daily Press that all the parents of Board School children are satisfied with the religious teaching now given in the Board Schools of London, we, the undersigned, parents of such children, in order to prove to the Board the falsity of that statement, and to help towards the introduction of moral teaching which shall make no appeal to supernatural or superhuman motives, do hereby protest that in general such motives are not suitable to the understanding and character of children, and are particularly out of place when taught in State Schools, which are maintained at the cost of citizens of every creed and of no creed.
“ The whole Service was well concluded within the ‘ dinner-hour * for which it was arranged. The services have been continued since Christmas. Mr. McCabe gave three addresses in January on ‘ The Failure of Dogmatic Religion ’, ‘ The Modern Cynic ’, and ‘ The Travail for the Superman ’, and then Dr. Coit resumed the conduct of the services. Although the DinnerHour Services have not been self-supporting, the Council considers them of great value and well worthy of increased support. The meetings are being continued to the end of June, and will begin again in October.”
This is a documentary history of the Ethical Movement in Great Britain, compiled mainly with the aid of the relatively rich material very kindly placed at my disposal by a number of Committees and individuals. Unfortunately, the provincial Societies are, with rare exceptions, reported on only indircedy because of the absence of relevant documents. However, some information concerning these Sociedes and much about the Movement generally will be found in the pages of The Ethical World (continued as Democracy, Ethics, Ethical Review, and The Ethical World) and its successor, The Humanist, These periodicals cover the period 1898 to 1922 and may be consulted at the British Museum Library. Acknowledgment of the documentary and other sources has been made in connection with each Chapter, but I would here repeat in general terms my infinite indebtedness to the Committees and individuals who collaborated. At the same time I would most warmly urge all British Ethical Societies to include in their Rules a paragraph to the effect that a copv of each Annual Report, pamphlet ^ly^ dated), periodical, etc., issueef by them, should be invariably forwarded to the British Museum Library (Bloomsbury, London, W.C.i), to ensure that a record of the activities of the British Ethical Movement is preserved for future generations. To which I would add the eminent desirability of comprehensive and comparable Annual Reports of the type described in Chapter I., Section ii.
Coit, National Idealism (1907) ↗ · ¶ 117 · ¶ 431 · ¶ 337 · ¶ 620 — quoted passages in context
Although those who dislike the conscious efforts of ecclesiastical institutions as somehow incompatible with true spirituality may not be aware of it themselves, this sentiment of theirs is essentially opposed to a belief in the spiritual organism of society as the source of r^ demptive energy. They maintain that a revival is more *- genuine and more holy if it come quite spontaneously. But why should man's purposes and man's reason and man's foresight have a polluting effect ? Are not consciousness and self-consciousness the highest manifestations of humanity and the chief blessings which society works in its individual members ? Why, again, is an event in the individual soul produced by occult and mysterious forces or by unembodied spirits any more beautiful or beneficent than one produced by human purpose and foresight ? Such a sentiment can only arise in a preference for the superhuman, which casts discredit upon and paralyses the efficiency of the human. Why is the conscious less to be treasured than the sub-conscious ? Why is effort less holy than spontaneity .'' If it be not less holy, why is a revival systematically planned and controlled less sacred and beneficent than an unpremeditated outburst .'' Those who discourage the effort of others in bringing about a man's conversion cast a slur upon conscious human effort altogether.
In order to avoid the prejudice against a ritual due to the fact that the idea embodied in it is to us not true, or if true of insignificant value, we must put ourselves by force of sympathetic imagination in the position of the devout and enthusiastic worshipper. When we have done this, then are we able to detect just how much of the effect of the religion we are studying is to be traced to the idea itself and how much to the forms and ceremonies in which it is embodied. We also are then able to detect what elements in these are capable of complete detachment from the special ideas which they serve and can be appropriateci by a religion which wholly discards trust in superhuman agencies as the source of moral inspiration.
Now, the older prophets, despite their trust in personal agencies outside of human society, were well aware that only by the systematic concentration of a nation's attention upon righteousness could a people ever reach honesty and the clear vision. The whole apparatus of Judaism and Christianity v/as instituted and perpetuated for the attainment of justice, by creating in the minds of the people a love of justice. The old worship, with its priests and prayers and holy books, was in ultimate aim a religion of justice. Its end was right. Its means unhappily were pre-scientific, but they were, however falsely interpreted, natural and human. If by " ecclesiastical religion " is meant a looking to supernatural persons for help, let us away with it. If prayer be but a petition to superhuman agencies, we have had enough of it. If books cannot be holy unless they teach submission to invisible and incorporeal beings, then without doubt the world needs no such things. But unassuming teachers and preachers of
It is wholly inconsistent with the policy of the humanist party in England to wish to introduce a uniformity by compromise or a uniformity by terrorising either a minority or a majority. Humanism as a religious policy can adopt no other method than that which I have indicated — conscious effort, tentative adaptation, private enterprise, until the forms and materials have so developed and their beauty and meaning have so challenged the affection and admiration of the public, that there will be no need to clamour or wrangle or resort to the subterfuges of a cunning opportunism.
On Sunday, 30 December 1934, Olaf Stapledon stood on the same platform — South Place, by then housed in Conway Hall — with thirty-four sheets of pencil notes titled “Humanism and Superhumanism,” and the enemy-word became a creed. Not “the superhuman” as an adjective of what must be silenced, but superhumanism: an -ism, a considered position, defined on his second and third sheets. (Whether he knew the word was this platform’s enemy-word — whether the reversal was aimed or unwitting — is a question the held record cannot answer; §3.3 holds it open and names the evidence that would close it.) Humanism he stated at its strongest — all service and worship due to “the awakening spirit of man” — and then set against it the attitude that humanism is not enough: a starting point in “some positive experience of worship of a nonhuman Other,” doctrinal elaboration inessential, practice essential. (The flagship analysis reads the whole argument movement by movement; §8 below takes from it only what the comparison needs.)
Primary source: the notes for this movement (sheets 2–3) — diplomatic transcription; every sheet links to its scan — sheets: 2 · 3
1
Humanism & Superhumanism
Definitions
My claim to speak: dissatisfaction with both
Humanism
Concise Oxford Dictionary: “Devotion to human interests;
system concerned with human(not divine) interests,
or with ð human race (not the individual)”
Let us say; An attitude of mind, a policy, a way of living, —
according to which —
“the proper study of mankind is man”, —
& ð proper object of all devotion is man.
1. nothing less than man is worthy of devotion;
or worshipful2. nothing more than man is knowable by men.
∴ all service, all loyalty, all praise & worship —
is due to ð awakening spirit of man
Service of Humanity should be —
ð dominant motive of ð individual's life
& ð dominant principle of politics
service of Humanity consists in —
helping to fulfil ð capacities of men
their vital & mental capacities,
helping others to be as human as possible,
to realise in themselves —
ð ideal form of human nature
helping to make a society favourable to —
ð fulfilment of human nature
2
Superhumanism defined
Let us call it: an attitude of mind, a way of living, a policy, -
according to which -
humanism is not enough
though ð positive side of humanism is sound, -
and essential, -
the denial of ð superhuman is an error
starting point of superhumanism:
either - a feeling ðt man is not enough
yearning(a vague dissatisfaction)
or - some positive experience of -
worship of a nonhuman Other
which may be conceived as -
gods, Fate, God, Nature,
a Principle of Order, ð Whole etc.
doctrinal elaboration not essential to Superhumanism
but almost inevitable
∵ ð Object of devotion is excessively obscure
(from ð intellectual point of view,
even if vivid in experience)
superhumanism issues in practice ⊙
⊙ either asis not merely a passive recognition of “God”, -
Worshipbut a regulative principle,
or as“making a difference to life, to conduct”
a regulative(eg Christian doctrine of salvation)
principle in
all conduct
Two facts about that word set this monograph’s course. First, its shape. “Superhumanism” is built like “humanism” — an orientation, not a creature. It does not name the superman; it names a posture toward what is more than man, which may be “gods, Fate, God, Nature, a Principle of Order, the Whole etc.” — the sheets’ own list. The contemporary abstract of the lecture (the Conway Hall catalogue’s summary of the Monthly Record report) caught the grammar precisely: humanism refers only to mankind, “but superhumanism to forces greater than man.” Second, its acoustics. Whatever the grammar said, the 1930s ear heard “superman” in it — the word Nietzsche’s translators had made famous, Shaw had made a breeding program, Wells and Beresford had made fiction, Galton’s heirs had made a policy, and Haldane and Bernal were making an engineering prospectus. Stapledon chose a title that could not help summoning the whole crowd of supermen — and then defined a position on which none of them is the object of worship. The rest of this monograph is the measurement of that gap, stream by stream: what each rival superhumanism proposed, what the record shows Stapledon knew of it, and where the 1934 position stands against it.
One more preliminary, because the comparison trades on it throughout. Whether “superhumanism” is Stapledon’s own coinage we do not know and do not claim — the flagship’s caution stands (no earlier use is known to us; priority is not established; the word never occurs in Crossley’s standard biography, read in full for this project). What the held record does establish is the word’s local history: on the platform where he raised it, it had been the enemy’s standard for forty-seven years. What no held record establishes is that Stapledon knew that history: “capture” — the deliberate raising of an enemy’s word — is the editors’ retrospective reading of a documented reversal, not a documented act, and this monograph keeps the two apart throughout (§3.3 states the open question and the evidence-classes that would settle it). §3 reconstructs the room that made the word’s career legible either way. But first, the oldest of the rival streams — the one that had already made “improving the breed” a religion of its own before Stapledon was born.
2. The bred higher life: Galton and the eugenic stream
The tier, first: this stream is documented reception at one end only. Stapledon’s first published essay, at age twenty-two, is an encomium on Francis Galton by name (§2.3); no held document shows him reading or citing Galton ever again. Galton’s two founding books are held and read (acquired August 2026 for this monograph); everything said about them below is verified against their text, and nothing in it is claimed as a source for the 1934 lecture. The stream matters to the comparison for a different reason: it fixed, two generations early, what “a higher humanity” would mean to the culture the lecture addressed — something you breed — and it ended its founding text, surprisingly, in a proto-cosmic theology close enough to the shelf’s later idiom to make the fork between the two roads visible in a single paragraph.
2.1 Hereditary Genius (1869): the programme and its grading machinery
Galton’s founding treatise opens with the whole stream in one sentence: as with dogs and horses, “so it would be quite practicable to produce a highly-gifted race of men by judicious marriages during several consecutive generations.” The same first paragraph supplies the moral escalation that made it a movement rather than a conjecture: “it is a duty we owe to humanity to investigate the range of that power, and to exercise it in a way that, without being unwise towards ourselves, shall be most advantageous to future inhabitants of the earth.” The premise is stated with a bluntness later hedging never softened: to the claim that “babies are born pretty much alike” he has no patience — “It is in the most unqualified manner that I object to pretensions of natural equality.”
Galton, Hereditary Genius (1869) ↗ · ¶ 86 · ¶ 122 — quoted passages in context
I PROPOSE to show in this book that a man's natural abilities are derived by inheritance, under exactly the same limitations as are the form and physical features of the whole organic world. Consequently, as it is easy, notwithstanding those limitations, to obtain by careful selection a permanent breed of dogs or horses gifted with peculiar powers of running, or of doing anything else, so it would be quite practicable to produce a highly-gifted race of men by judicious marriages during several consecutive generations. I shall show that social agencies of an ordinary character, whose influences are little suspected, are at this moment working towards the degradation of human nature, and that others are working towards its improvement. I conclude that each generation has enormous power over the natural gifts of those that follow, and maintain that it is a duty we owe to humanity to investigate the range of that power, and to exercise it in a way that, without being unwise towards ourselves, shall be most advantageous to future inhabitants of the earth.
I HAVE no patience with the hypothesis occasionally expressed, and often implied, especially in tales written to teach children to be good, that babies are born pretty much alike, arid that the sole agencies in creating differences between boy and boy, and man and man, are steady application and moral effort. It is in the most unqualified manner that I object to pretensions of natural equality. The experiences of the nursery, the school, the University, and of professional careers, are a chain of proofs to the contrary. I acknowledge freely the great power of education and social influences in developing the active powers of the mind, just as I acknowledge the effect of use in developing the muscles of a blacksmith's arm, and no further. Let the blacksmith labour as he will, he will find there are certain feats beyond his power that are well within the strength of a man of herculean make, even although the latter may have led a sedentary life. Some years ago, the Highlanders held a grand gathering in Holland Park, where they challenged all England to compete with them in their games of strength. The challenge was accepted, and the well-trained men of the hills were beaten in the foot-race by a youth who was stated to be a pure Cockney, the clerk of a London banker.
What the book actually builds is a grading machine. Its instrument is reputation — “I look upon social and professional life as a continuous examination”; “By reputation, I mean the opinion of contemporaries, revised by posterity” — and its scale is Quetelet’s law of error, sliced into lettered grades: “The number of grades into which we may divide ability is purely a matter of option,” grades a–g below the average and A–G above, with the summit classes F and G “together with X (which includes all cases beyond G, and which are unclassed)” summing to 248 per million. And the machine’s advertised generality is racial: the chapter on “The Comparative Worth of Different Races” runs the same arithmetic across mankind — “the average intellectual standard of the negro race is some two grades below our own”; “The Australian type is at least one grade below the African negro”; the ancient Athenians two grades above the English, “about as much as our race is above that of the African negro,” the English average gauged “by a glance at the contents of a railway book-stall.” The racism is not an appendix to the method; it is the method, applied. Any honest genealogy of the “higher man” in English thought starts here, in a ledger.
Galton, Hereditary Genius (1869) ↗ · ¶ 101 · ¶ 189 · ¶ 171 · ¶ 2622 · ¶ 2626 · ¶ 2637 — quoted passages in context
I look upon social and professional life as a continuous examination. All are candidates for the good opinions of others, and for success in their several professions, and they
Let it clearly be borne in mind, what I mean by reputation and ability. By reputation, I mean the opinion of contemporaries, revised by posterity—the favourable result of a critical analysis of each man's character, by many biographers. I do not mean high social or official position, nor such as is implied by being the mere lion of a London season; but I speak of the reputation of a leader of opinion, of an originator, of a man to whom the world deliberately acknowledges itself largely indebted.
The number of grades into which we may divide ability is purely a matter of option. We may consult our convenience by sorting Englishmen into a few large classes, or into many small ones. I will select a system of classification that shall be easily comparable with the numbers of eminent men, as determined in the previous chapter. We have seen that 250 men per million become eminent; accordingly, I have so contrived the classes in the following table that the two highest, F and G, together with X (which includes all cases beyond G, and which are unclassed),
Secondly, the negro race is by no means wholly deficient in men capable of becoming good factors, thriving merchants, and otherwise considerably raised above the average of whites—that is to say, it can not unfrequently supply men corresponding to our class C, or even D. It will be recollected that C implies a selection of 1 in 16, or somewhat more than the natural abilities possessed by average foremen of common juries, and that D is as 1 in 64—a degree of ability that is sure to make a man successful in life. In short, classes E and F of the negro may roughly be considered as the equivalent of our C and D—a result which again points to the conclusion, that the average intellectual standard of the negro race is some two grades below our own.
The Australian type is at least one grade below the African negro. I possess a few serviceable data about the
Now let us attempt to compare the Athenian standard of ability with that of our own race and time. We have no men to put by the side of Socrates and Phidias, because the millions of all Europe, breeding as they have done for the subsequent 2,000 years, have never produced their equals. They are, therefore, two or three grades above our G—they might rank as I or J. But, supposing we do not count them at all, saying that some freak of nature acting at that time, may have produced them, what must we say about the rest? Pericles and Plato would rank, I suppose, the one among the greatest of philosophical statesmen, and the other as at least the equal of Lord Bacon. They would, therefore, stand somewhere among our unclassed X, one or two grades above G—let us call them between H and I. All the remainder—the F of the Athenian race— would rank above our G, and equal to or close upon our H. It follows from all this, that the average ability of the Athenian race is, on the lowest possible estimate, very nearly two grades higher than our own—that is, about as much as our race is above that of the African negro. This estimate, which may seem prodigious to some, is confirmed by the quick intelligence and high culture of the Athenian commonalty, before whom literary works were recited, and works of art exhibited, of a far more severe character than could possibly be appreciated by the average of our race, the calibre of whose intellect is easily gauged by a glance at the contents of a railway book-stall.
The programme is marriage-demography — “the wisest policy is, that which results in retarding the average age of marriage among the weak, and in hastening it among the vigorous classes” — with the Church indicted, in breeder’s language, for exacting celibacy of the gentle and able: “by a policy so singularly unwise and suicidal that I am hardly able to speak of it without impatience, the Church brutalized the breed of our forefathers.” By the 1892 second edition (the text held), Galton regrets exactly one thing, and it is not the project: “The fault in the volume that I chiefly regret is the choice of its title of Hereditary Genius, but it cannot be remedied now” — he had meant inborn ability, and if the book could be re-titled “it should appear as Hereditary Ability.” The reason for the regret is diagnostic of the whole stream: genius as daemonic inspiration “is perilously near to the voices heard by the insane… nor can it be desirable to perpetuate it by inheritance.” The bred higher life must be sane, gradable, reproducible — nothing uncanny in it. Where the 1934 lecture’s higher term is an unspeakable Other whose apprehension carries “mystery, majesty, formidableness, horror,” Galton’s is an examination result extended by stud-book. The 1892 preface then escalates without blinking: nothing forbids “a race of sane men… who shall be as much superior mentally and morally to the modern European, as the modern European is to the lowest of the Negro races.”
Galton, Hereditary Genius (1869) ↗ · ¶ 2662 · ¶ 2677 · ¶ 15 · ¶ 17 · ¶ 20 — quoted passages in context
I shall have occasion to show that certain influences retard the average age of marriage, while others hasten it; and the general character of my argument will be to prove, that an enormous effect upon the average natural ability of a race may be produced by means of those influences. I shall argue that the wisest policy is, that which results in retarding the average age of marriage among the weak, and in hastening it among the vigorous classes; whereas, most unhappily for us, the influence of numerous social
The long period of the dark ages under which Europe has lain is due, I believe in a very considerable degree, to the celibacy enjoined by religious orders on their votaries. Whenever a man or woman was possessed of a gentle nature that fitted him or her to deeds of charity, to meditation, to literature, or to art, the social condition of the time was such that they had no refuge elsewhere than in the bosom of the Church. But the Church chose to preach and exact celibacy. The consequence was that these gentle natures had no continuance, and thus, by a policy so singularly unwise and suicidal that I am hardly able to speak of it without impatience, the Church brutalized the breed of our forefathers. She acted precisely as if she had aimed at selecting the rudest portion of the community to be, alone, the parents of future generations. She practised the arts which breeders would use, who aimed at creating ferocious, currish and stupid natures. No wonder that club-law prevailed for centuries over Europe; the wonder rather is that enough good remained in the veins of Europeans
The fault in the volume that I chiefly regret is the choice of its title of Hereditary Genius, but it cannot be remedied now. There was not the slightest intention on my part to use the word genius in any technical sense, but merely as expressing an ability that was exceptionally high, and at the same time inborn. It was intended to be used in the senses ascribed to the word in Johnson's Dictionary, viz. “Mental power or faculties. Disposition of nature by which any one is qualified to some peculiar employment. Nature; disposition.” A person who is a genius is defined as—A man endowed with superior faculties. This exhausts all that Johnson has to say on the matter, except as regards the imaginary creature of classical authors called a Genius, which does not concern us, and which he describes as the protecting or ruling power of men, places, or things. There is nothing in the quotations from standard authors with which Johnson illustrates his definitions, that justifies a strained and technical sense being given to the word, nor is there anything of the kind in the Latin word ingenium.
genius does. The reader will find a studious abstinence throughout the work from speaking of genius as a special quality. It is freely used as an equivalent for natural ability, in the opening of the chapter on “Comparison of the Two Classifications.” In the only place, so far as I have noticed on reading the book again, where any distinction is made between them, the uncertainty that still clings to the meaning of the word genius in its technical sense is emphatically dwelt upon (p. 320). There is no confusion of ideas in this respect in the book, but its title seems apt to mislead, and if it could be altered now, it should appear as Hereditary Ability.
There is much that is indefinite in the application of the word genius. It is applied to many a youth by his contemporaries, but more rarely by biographers, who do not always agree among themselves. If genius means a sense of inspiration, or of rushes of ideas from apparently supernatural sources, or of an inordinate and burning desire to accomplish any particular end, it is perilously near to the voices heard by the insane, to their delirious tendencies, or to their monomanias. It cannot in such cases be a healthy faculty, nor can it be desirable to perpetuate it by inheritance. The natural ability of which this book mainly treats, is such as a modern European possesses in a much greater average share than men of the lower races. There is nothing either in the history of domestic animals or in that of evolution to make us doubt that a race of sane men may be formed who shall be as much superior mentally and morally to the modern European, as the modern European is to the lowest of the Negro races. Individual departures from this high average level in an upward direction would afford an adequate supply of a degree of ability that is exceedingly rare now, and is much wanted.
And yet the book does not end in the stud-book register. Its closing chapter mounts an actual theology, and it deserves quoting at length because it is the eugenic stream’s one genuine approach to the cosmic idiom this project tracks. “We are exceedingly ignorant of the reasons why we exist,” Galton writes, “confident only that individual life is a portion of some vaster system that struggles arduously onwards, towards ends that are dimly seen or wholly unknown to us” — and the final paragraph dissolves the individual into “a wave that has been lifted and shaped by normal conditions in an unknown, illimitable ocean,” concludes “that the constitution of the living Universe is a pure theism, and that its form of activity is what may be described as co-operative,” and ends with men contributing, as cells to a body, “to the manifestation of a far higher life than our own.” Set that beside the 1934 sheets and the fork in the road is exact. Both positions posit a higher life dimly seen, of which man is an organ. But Galton’s higher life is bred and co-operated with — man’s part is to “bring other policies into action, that shall tell on the natural gifts of his race” — where the lecture’s Other is saluted, never engineered, and precisely not a product of ours. One higher life is downstream of us; the other is not on our river at all. That is the founding fork of everything this monograph compares, and it was open by 1869. (Comparison, not influence: nothing shows Stapledon read this book. The eeriness of the parallel is the period’s, not a borrowing — the Victorian evolutionary imagination fed both roads.)
Galton, Hereditary Genius (1869) ↗ · ¶ 2658 · ¶ 2735 · ¶ 2660 — quoted passages in context
We are exceedingly ignorant of the reasons why we exist, confident only that individual life is a portion of some vaster system that struggles arduously onwards, towards ends that are dimly seen or wholly unknown to us, by means of the various affinities—the sentiments, the intelligences, the tastes, the appetites—of innumerable personalities who ceaselessly succeed one another on the stage of existence.
Nature teems with latent life, which man has large powers of evoking under the forms and to the extent which he desires. We must not permit ourselves to consider each human or other personality as something supernaturally added to the stock of nature, but rather as a segregation of what already existed, under a new shape, and as a regular consequence of previous conditions. Neither must we be misled by the word “individuality,” because it appears from the many facts and arguments in this book, that our personalities are not so independent as our self-consciousness leads us to believe. We may look upon each individual as something not wholly detached from its parent source,—as a wave that has been lifted and shaped by normal conditions in an unknown, illimitable ocean. There is decidedly a solidarity as well as a separate-ness in all human, and probably in all lives whatsoever; and this consideration goes far, as I think, to establish an opinion that the constitution of the living Universe is a pure theism, and that its form of activity is what may be described as co-operative. It points to the conclusion that all life is single in its essence, but various, ever varying, and inter-active in its manifestations, and that men and all other living animals are active workers and sharers in a vastly more extended system of cosmic action than any of ourselves, much less of them, can possibly comprehend. It also suggests that they may contribute, more or less unconsciously, to the manifestation of a far higher life than our own, somewhat as—I do not propose to push the metaphor too far—the individual cells of one of the more complex animals contribute to the manifestation of its higher order of personality.
the world itself; also, by analogy, of other scenes of existence than this particular planet of one of innumerable suns. Our world appears hitherto to have developed itself, mainly under the influence of unreasoning affinities; but of late, Man, slowly growing to be intelligent, humane, and capable, has appeared on the scene of life and profoundly modified its conditions. He has already become able to look after his own interests in an incomparably more far-sighted manner, than in the old pre-historic days of barbarism and flint knives; he is already able to act on the experiences of the past, to combine closely with distant allies, and to prepare for future wants, known only through the intelligence, long before their pressure has become felt. He has introduced a vast deal of civilization and hygiene which influence, in an immense degree, his own well-being and that of his children; it remains for him to bring other policies into action, that shall tell on the natural gifts of his race.
2.2 Inquiries into Human Faculty (1883): the coinage in situ
The word “eugenics” itself — the stream’s flag — enters the language not as a manifesto but as a hedged aside with a footnote. The held Inquiries into Human Faculty (the 1907 Everyman second edition, Galton’s own abridgment) shows the coinage in situ: the book’s intention “is to touch on various topics more or less connected with that of the cultivation of race, or, as we might call it, with ‘eugenic’ questions,” and the footnote hung off that word defines it — “good in stock, hereditarily endowed with noble qualities,” a “brief word to express the science of improving stock,” covering not judicious mating only but “all influences that tend in however remote a degree” to give “the more suitable races or strains of blood a better chance of prevailing speedily over the less suitable”; the new word is “at least a neater word and a more generalised one than viriculture, which I once ventured to use.” By the 1907 preface Galton could claim, accurately, that the book “became the starting point of that recent movement in favour of National Eugenics… which is recognised by the University of London.”
Galton, Inquiries into Human Faculty (1883) ↗ · ¶ 157 · ¶ 160 · ¶ 6 — quoted passages in context
I do not propose to enter further into the anthropometric differences of race, for the subject is a very large one, and this book does not profess to go into detail. Its intention is to touch on various topics more or less connected with that of the cultivation of race, or, as we might call it, with "eugenic" [1] questions, and to present the results of several of my own separate investigations.
[Footnote 2: That is, with questions bearing on what is termed in Greek, _eugenes_, namely, good in stock, hereditarily endowed with noble qualities. This, and the allied words, _eugeneia_, etc., are equally applicable to men, brutes, and plants. We greatly want a brief word to express the science of improving stock, which is by no means confined to questions of judicious mating, but which, especially in the case of man, takes cognisance of all influences that tend in however remote a degree to give to the more suitable races or strains of blood a better chance of prevailing speedily over the less suitable than they otherwise would have had. The word _eugenics_ would sufficiently express the idea; it is at least a neater word and a more generalised one than _viriculture_, which I once ventured to use.]
After some years had passed subsequent to the publication of this book in 1883, its publishers, Messrs. Macmillan, informed me that the demand for it just, but only just warranted a revised issue. I shrank from the great trouble of bringing it up to date because it, or rather many of my memoirs out of which it was built up, had become starting-points for elaborate investigations both in England and in America, to which it would be difficult and very laborious to do justice in a brief compass. So the question of a Second Edition was then entirely dropped. Since that time the book has by no means ceased to live, for it continues to be quoted from and sought for, but is obtainable only with difficulty, and at much more than its original cost, at sales of second-hand books. Moreover, it became the starting point of that recent movement in favour of National Eugenics (see note p. 24 in first edition) which is recognised by the University of London, and has its home in University College.
Two features of the 1883 programme matter for the comparison, and both are verified negatives as much as positives. First, its machinery is persuasion, marks and money, not statute: watch for “the indications of superior strains or races,” favour them so “their progeny shall outnumber and gradually replace that of the old one”; encourage early marriage in the able (“if the races best fitted to occupy the land are encouraged to marry early, they will breed down the others in a very few generations”); let “family merit” count “for however little, in competitive examinations,” since “Any act that first gives a guinea stamp to the sterling guinea’s worth of natural nobility might set a great social avalanche in motion”; endow the marriages of “those of both sexes who showed evidences of high race.” In the held text “sterili-” as a proposal occurs nowhere, “compulsion” only of work-shy labourers, “segregat-” only of cattle and the insane; no marriage legislation is proposed at all. The harshness is real but rhetorical — “the land is overstocked and overburdened with the listless and the incapable” — and the same paragraph that names “the most merciful form of what I ventured to call ‘eugenics’” contemplates, for a low race under hard conditions, the alternative: “The few best specimens of that race can alone be allowed to become parents, and not many of their descendants can be allowed to live.” Second, the programme is framed, explicitly, as a religion — but a religion of duty toward evolution, not of worship. Man’s inherited organisation “should be considered as a sacred trust”; he ought to “assume a deliberate part in furthering the great work of evolution,” though “he has not yet risen to the conviction that it is his religious duty to do so deliberately and systematically”; and the book’s final paragraph names its own moral — “the religious significance of the doctrine of evolution,” the “new duty… an endeavour to further evolution, especially that of the human race.” Galton’s religion has a task and no altar; the 1934 lecture’s has an altar and forbids itself the task’s consolations. Between them, in 1908, stands a Liverpool undergraduate who wanted both.
Galton, Inquiries into Human Faculty (1883) ↗ · ¶ 789 · ¶ 827 · ¶ 841 · ¶ 843 · ¶ 164 · ¶ 782 · ¶ 863 — quoted passages in context
Whenever a low race is preserved under conditions of life that exact a high level of efficiency, it must be subjected to rigorous selection. The few best specimens of that race can alone be allowed to become parents, and not many of their descendants can be allowed to live. On the other hand, if a higher race be substituted for the low one, all this terrible misery disappears. The most merciful form of what I ventured to call "eugenics" would consist in watching for the indications of superior strains or races, and in so favouring them that their progeny shall outnumber and gradually replace that of the old one. Such strains are of no infrequent occurrence. It is easy to specify families who are characterised by strong resemblances, and whose features and character are usually prepotent over those of their wives or husbands in their joint offspring, and who are at the same time as prolific as the average of their class. These strains can be conveniently studied in the families of exiles, which, for obvious reasons, are easy to trace in their various branches.
The general result is that the group B gradually disappears, and the group A more than supplants it. Hence if the races best fitted to occupy the land are encouraged to marry early, they will breed down the others in a very few generations.
Let us now suppose that a way was seen for carrying some such idea as this into practice, and that family merit, however defined, was allowed to count, for however little, in competitive examinations. The effect would be very great: it would show that ancestral qualities are of present current value; it would give an impetus to collecting family histories; it would open the eyes of every family and or society at large to the importance of marriage alliance with a good stock; it would introduce the subject of race into a permanent topic of consideration, which (on the supposition of its _bonâ fide_ importance that has been assumed for the sake of argument) experience would show to be amply justified. Any act that first gives a guinea stamp to the sterling guinea's worth of natural nobility might set a great social avalanche in motion.
Endowments and bequests have been freely and largely made for various social purposes, and as a matter of history they have frequently been made to portion girls in marriage. It so happens that the very day that I am writing this, I notice an account in the foreign newspapers (September 19, 1882) of an Italian who has bequeathed a sum to the corporation of London to found small portions for three poor girls to be selected by lot. And again, a few weeks ago I read also in the French papers of a trial, in reference to the money adjudged to the "Rosière" of a certain village. Many cases in which individuals and states have portioned girls may be found in Malthus. It is therefore far from improbable that if the merits of good race became widely recognised and its indications were rendered more surely intelligible than they now are, that local endowments, and perhaps adoptions, might be made in favour of those of both sexes who showed evidences of high race and of belonging to prolific and thriving families. One cannot forecast their form, though we may reckon with some assurance that in one way or another they would be made, and that the better races would be given a better chance of marrying early.
It may be objected that if the race were too healthy and energetic there would be insufficient call for the exercise of the pitying and self-denying virtues, and the character of men would grow harder in consequence. But it does not seem reasonable to preserve sickly breeds for the sole purpose of tending them, as the breed of foxes is preserved solely for sport and its attendant advantages. There is little fear that misery will ever cease from the land, or that the compassionate will fail to find objects for their compassion; but at present the supply vastly exceeds the demand: the land is overstocked and overburdened with the listless and the incapable.
An incalculable amount of lower life has been certainly passed through before that human organisation was attained, of which we and our generation are for the time the holders and transmitters. This is no mean heritage, and I think it should be considered as a sacred trust, for, together with man, intelligence of a sufficiently high order to produce great results appears, so far as we can infer from the varied records of the prehistoric past, to have first dawned upon the tenantry of the earth. Man has already shown his large power in the modifications he has made on the surface of the globe, and in the distribution of plants and animals. He has cleared such vast regions of forest that his work that way in North America alone, during the past half century, would be visable to an observer as far off as the moon. He has dug and drained; he has exterminated plants and animals that were mischievous to him; he has domesticated those that serve his purpose, and transplanted them to great distances from their native places. Now that this new animal man, finds himself somehow in existence, endowed with a little power and intelligence, he ought, I submit, to awake to a fuller knowledge of his relatively great position, and begin to assume a deliberate part in furthering the great work of evolution. He may infer the course it is bound to pursue, from his observation of that which it has already followed, and he might devote his modicum of power, intelligence, and kindly feeling to render its future progress less slow and painful. Man has already furthered evolution very considerably, half unconsciously, and for his own personal advantages, but he has not yet risen to the conviction that it is his religious duty to do so deliberately and systematically.
To sum up in a few words. The chief result of these Inquiries has been to elicit the religious significance of the doctrine of evolution. It suggests an alteration in our mental attitude, and imposes a new moral duty. The new mental attitude is one of a greater sense of moral freedom, responsibility, and opportunity; the new duty which is supposed to be exercised concurrently with, and not in opposition to the old ones upon which the social fabric depends, is an endeavour to further evolution, especially that of the human race.
2.3 “Columbus found a new world”: the 1908 encomium, and the usage arc
The one documented contact is loud. Stapledon’s first published essay, “The Splendid Race” (1908, his school’s old-boys’ magazine), opens: “COLUMBUS FOUND A NEW WORLD; but Francis Galton found a new humanity.” Crossley’s endnote files the piece plainly as “an encomium on Francis Galton’s proposals for the ‘Improvement of the Human Breed’” — the scheme-title the essay cites is Galton’s 1901 Huxley Lecture (unheld), so which Galton text the undergraduate read is unsettled — and its programme is recognizably the Inquiries machinery continued: family records, “a true pride of birth,” the poor specimens dying out unmarried, “For them celibacy is self-denial for the good of the community.” Where the twenty-two-year-old goes past his hero is exactly where the flagship’s §3.11 fixes him: tainted marriages “should be regarded as a kind of incest,” to be “prevented by public opinion, which should be aided by legislation” — a statutory clause that is the young man’s addition to a persuasion-only programme. The essay wants Galton’s future — “we may improve the standard of mankind by wisely restricting undesirable marriages,” making it “as possible to breed good men as it is now possible to breed fast horses,” until “in time there will arise a splendid race of men” — and it wants it with a fervour the older man’s actuarial prose never risks: the coming race will feel “an emotion far more intense and far more divine.”
rare pieces (1908–49) ↗ · ¶ 39 · ¶ 41 · ¶ 44 · ¶ 40 · ¶ 46 — quoted passages in context
COLUMBUS FOUND A NEW WORLD; but Francis Galton found a new humanity. The former discovery has given us gold and enterprise; from the latter we may hope for gentlemen, even heroes. It was long after the voyage of Columbus that the new world began to be used by the old. So also it will be long after the first probing of the subject that mankind will begin to profit by the science of heredity. After the work of Mendel, Weismann, Galton, and others, our conception of humanity must be fundamentally altered. To the ancient the human type was a rock, created fixed for evermore. To the man of the last century it was a cloud, ever changing but unalterable. To us it must be a virgin continent, to be cultivated and civilised. Darwin showed that man is the result of evolution. Others have shown that he may direct his evolution. Hitherto we have sought progress with social and political contrivances; but soon we shall bring to bear what may be a far more potent method. Mankind is like a child that has been patiently gathering apples as they fall, when suddenly he has the glorious idea of climbing the tree. Hitherto he has been stinted, but now there opens a vision of plenty to be realised by pluck and skill. For mankind the apples are health and strength, intellect and virtue.
The application of the knowledge which has been already acquired is still hampered by universal prejudice. Not till this has been destroyed can we hope to realise the schemes of Galton for the "Improvement of the Human Breed." He suggested that records should be kept of the history of every family, that every man might know something of his hereditary capabilities and liabilities. In this way he hoped that there would arise a true pride of birth. No one of clean pedigree would be likely to marry into a tainted family. There would be a real aristocracy of birth. The poorer specimens would be continually dying out, since it would be hard for them to marry. He also points out that it cannot be held cruel to allow undesirables to die out in this way. The individuals may still live happy and useful lives. For them celibacy is self-denial for the good of the community. But nothing can be done till the interest in these things is universal. The homage paid to riches and "nobility" must be replaced by a more honest homage to pure birth, the true nobility.
We are told not to interfere with the divine caprice of love. Surely this is unreasonable. We lament when a friend marries into a social class lower than his own. We should have more reason to deplore his marriage into a family tainted with disease or moral weakness. Love is capricious; but even now it is confined within certain limits. It is held wicked to indulge it beyond them; and such is the force of public opinion that it seldom occurs beyond them. A marriage in which husband and wife bear some particular taint may well produce children some of whom are seriously deformed in mind or body. Such marriages should be regarded as a kind of incest. In time they will be prevented by public opinion, which should be aided by legislation. At first, no doubt, there will be many tragedies of revolt against custom and law. It may be held that love exists not merely for the perpetuation of the race, but is an end in itself, the spiritual union and beatitude of individual men and women. The noble type of love which can claim to be a spiritual end in itself has evolved from something less noble. If it be wisely controlled now, in time humanity may be capable of an emotion far more intense and far more divine.
Already lives have been spent in building up the science of heredity. But not till a wide-spread interest has been aroused can that science be applied to the art of eugenics. There must be a general acquaintance with the wonderful results of statistical investigation and experiment. Most biologists agree that man is the expression of a multiplicity of inherited characteristics, which environment can affect directly only during the life of the individual. They believe that characteristics acquired during the lifetime of the parent are not heritable. But some deny this. It is right that we should all know something of this controversy since its importance to eugenics is very great. If the nature, far more than the nurture, of the parent determines the character of the child, the unwholesomeness of these days may not seriously affect our descendants. But it is allowed by all that a bad habit, or evil surroundings, through weakening the system, may cause the offspring to be stunted. Whatever be the final result of this controversy, much can be done for the improvement of the race. It seems clear that physical, mental, and moral characters are governed by the same broad laws of inheritance. In time it may be as possible to breed good men as it is now possible to breed fast horses. This is the goal at which we should aim. Meanwhile we may improve the standard of mankind by wisely restricting undesirable marriages. Thus we may eradicate not only the liability to special diseases, insanity, and crime, but also general weakness and general incompetence.
As yet we are very far from this. But, having stumbled for a long time in the valleys, at last we have arrived at an eminence from which the right way can be seen leading upwards into the mists. It may be that after much labour and many catastrophes in time there will arise a splendid race of men, far wiser than we can hope to be, and far greater hearted.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 1818 — quoted passage in context
49. "Captain James Walker" manuscript (SFP). 50. OS diary, 22 Mar. 1912 (SA). 51. OS to ES, 29 Mar. 1912 (SFP). 52. OS to ES, 1 Apr. 1912 (SFP). 53. *OJ*, 191. 54. OS to WS and ES, 8 May 1912 [misdated 1910] (SFP). 55. OS made a lexicon of his shorthand symbols in the endpapers of his 1912 diary (SA). 56. OS to AM, 22 July 1912; OS to ES, 21 June, 5 July 1912 (SFP). 57. OS diary, 30 June, 2 July, 3 July, 5 July 1912 (SA). 58. OS diary, 8–9 July 1912 (SA). 59. A shorthand draft of the epic's invocation survives in the 1912 diary (SA). 60. OS diary, 17 Aug. 1912 (SA). 61. I have found two published poems from this period: "The Builder" in the *Old Abbotsholmian* 3, no. 11 (1912), 169, and "A Prayer" in the *Highway* 5 (Oct. 1912), 5. Other poems may have appeared in provincial newspapers. Of the prose pieces, only the last exists in finished form: "The People, Self Educator," *Old Abbotsholmian* 3, no. 12 (1913), 203–207. OS's interest in eugenics dates to his Oxford years; he published an encomium on Francis Galton's proposals for the "Improvement of the Human Breed" in "The Splendid Race," *Old Abbotsholmian* 2, no. 8 (1908), 212–16. 62. OS to ES, 23 Jan. 1913 (SFP). His diary entry for the same date (SA) indicates he knew that he and Dot were responsible for his mother's "flight." 63. OS to ES, dated "Thursday night"—probably 23 Jan. 1913 (SFP). 64. OS diary, 12 and 18 Jan. 1913 (SA). 65. OS to ES, 12 Feb. 1913 (SFP). Letters from ES to her husband in the 1890s express a wish for more children. 66. OS, manuscript, "Letters to a Militiaman" (SA). 67. OS, from a self-portrait written for the dust jacket of *PL*.
The arc from that essay to the mature usage is traced, with documents, in the flagship’s §3.11, and this monograph will not duplicate it — only mark its two ends, because the comparison needs them. By Last and First Men (1930) the word has shrunk to a chronicle item (“some general but mostly unenlightened policy of eugenics”); the uncensored 1931 broadcast re-scopes it as species-engineering (“our clever biologists and our bold eugenists. They want to control man’s inborn nature”); and Interplanetary Man? (1948) completes the semantic journey — “sufficient biological knowledge and eugenical technique… to breed new human types of men to people the planets,” now with a caution Galton never needed (“none of these eugenical ventures should be attempted without thorough knowledge of the probable indirect results”). Galton’s word denoted shifting marriage-rates within existing stock by honour and money; by Stapledon’s late usage it denotes making new kinds of man. The stream widened under the word. And the word itself was period currency at every station this monograph visits: Wells in 1905 — “what Mr. Francis Galton now calls ‘Eugenics’” — and Beresford’s 1911 narrator citing “Mr. Galton” on genius in the female line.
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 452 — quoted passage in context
Many scores of other cultures occurred, separated often by long ages of barbarism, but they must be ignored in this brief chronicle. The great majority of them were mainly biological in spirit. Thus one was dominated by an obsessive interest in flight, and therefore in birds, another by the concept of metabolism, several by sexual creativity, and very many by some general but mostly unenlightened policy of eugenics. All these we must pass over, so that we may descend to watch the greatest of all the races of the third species torture itself into a new form.
rare pieces (1908–49) ↗ · ¶ 90 — quoted passage in context
But further, we have our clever biologists and our bold eugenists. They want to control man's inborn nature, too. Already they have learnt a few surprising tricks, and probably within a century or two they will have learnt many more.
Interplanetary Man? (1948) ↗ · ¶ 14 · ¶ 16 — quoted passages in context
IV. Adapting Man to the Planets IT IS TIME to approach the whole matter from another angle. If the mountain will not come to Mohamet, Mohamet must go to the mountain. If the planets are unadaptable to man in his present form, perhaps man might adapt himself to the alien environments of those strange worlds. Or rather, perhaps a combination of the two processes might enable man to make the best possible use of those worlds. In fact, given sufficient biological knowledge and eugenical technique, it might be possible to breed new human types of men to people the planets. Once more, Mars seems to offer the best opportunity. It should be fairly easy to produce a variety of homo sapiens capable of surviving the rigours of an improved Martian environment. Perhaps the best human stock from which to start would be the Tibetans, who are used to a cold, arid climate and a rarified atmosphere. But unless the Martian atmosphere could be augmented quite a lot, and the surface temperature greatly raised, the specialized human Martians would probably lack the vital energy for any kind of highly developed civilization. Only where nature blossoms with a certain luxuriance can the human spirit itself blossom. However, by a combination of environmental and eugenical alteration, it might perhaps be possible in the long run to establish a vigorous population on Mars. On Venus, given oxygen and water, man’s biochemical and eugenical technique might perhaps produce a well-adapted human variety or a new human species. Since Venerian man would have to stand great heat, the work might start with experiments on some Equatorial varieties of our species. Presumably in that hot world a dark skin would be useful; unless,
Enough has been said to suggest that the colonization of some of the planets may in time become practicable, if terrestrial man continues to develop his control of the physical environment through atomic power, and if he attains sufficient biological knowledge and eugenical art to breed, or otherwise construct, human or quasi-human races adapted to strange environments. But a word of caution is necessary. It is extremely important that none of these eugenical ventures should be attempted without thorough knowledge of the probable indirect results of each proposed change. For instance, it would be disastrous to aim at very small stature without doing something to avoid reduction in intelligence. Further, it is necessary to have very clear ideas as to which human characteristics are unimportant and might be safely sacrificed, and which are indispensable and should never be endangered. Thus good vision, high intelligence, co-operativeness and manual dexterity are indispensable and should if possible be increased; while teeth and cranial hair could if necessary be sacrificed. The result of thoughtless “messing about” with human nature might be the psychological and spiritual ruin of man. OceanofPDF.com
Wells, A Modern Utopia (1905) ↗ · ¶ 607 — quoted passage in context
[…] two hundred persons was successfully organised by John Humphrey Noyes at Oneida Creek. [Footnote: See John H. Noyes's History of American Socialisms and his writings generally. The bare facts of this and the other American experiments are given, together with more recent matter, by Morris Hillquirt, in The History of Socialism in the United States.] It is fairly certain in the latter case that there was no "promiscuity," and that the members mated for variable periods, and often for life, within the group. The documents are reasonably clear upon that point. This Oneida community was, in fact, a league of two hundred persons to regard their children as "common." Choice and preference were not abolished in the community, though in some cases they were set aside--just as they are by many parents under our present conditions. There seems to have been a premature attempt at "stirpiculture," at what Mr. Francis Galton now calls "Eugenics," in the mating of the members, and there was also a limitation of offspring. Beyond these points the inner secrets of the community do not appear to be very profound; its atmosphere was almost commonplace, it was made up of very ordinary people. There is no doubt that it had a career of exceptional success throughout the whole lifetime of its founder, and it broke down with the advent of a new generation, with the onset of theological differences, and the loss of its guiding intelligence. The Anglo-Saxon spirit, it has been said by one of the ablest children of the experiment, is too individualistic for communism. It is possible to regard the temporary success of this complex family as a strange accident, as the wonderful exploit of what was certainly a very exceptional man. Its final disintegration into frankly monogamic couples--it is still a prosperous business association--may […]
Beresford, Hampdenshire Wonder (1911) ↗ · ¶ 1734 — quoted passage in context
[2] A study of genius shows that in a percentage of cases so large as to exclude the possibility of coincidence, the exceptional man, whether in the world of action, of art, or of letters, seems to inherit his magnificent powers through the female line. Mr. Galton, it is true, did not make a great point of this curious observation, but the tendency of more recent analyses is all in the direction of confirming the hypothesis; and it would seem to hold good in the converse proposition, namely, that the exceptional woman inherits her qualities from her father.
What the Galton stream never contains — searched for, not merely missed — is the bred higher life as an object of worship. The word itself occurs in both books, but only in passing anthropology, never as doctrine: prisoners who are “the best attendants on religious worship” in 1869, the aside that “Serpent worship was very widely spread” in 1883 — nowhere is the produced higher life a thing to kneel to. The bred higher life is graded, produced, and joined; it is never faced. Even the closing theology of 1869 makes man a co-operating cell of the higher life, not its worshipper. When §8 reaches Stapledon’s inversion, this is the first of the streams it inverts: the 1934 position keeps the ranked capacities (that is the uncomfortable half of the record, and the flagship §3.11 ledger holds it beside the rest) while relocating the divine entirely outside the breeding program’s reach. The splendid race, if it ever came, would still stand under the same Other, saluting.
Galton, Hereditary Genius (1869) ↗ · ¶ 2213 — quoted passage in context
The table (p. 34) of the distribution of natural gifts is necessarily as true of morals as of intellect or of muscle. If we class a vast number of men into fourteen classes, separated by equal grades of morality as regards their natural disposition, the number of men per million in the different classes will be as stated in the table. I have no doubt that many of Middleton's divines belong to class G, in respect to their active benevolence, unselfishness, and other amiable qualities. But men of the lowest grades of morals may also have pious aptitudes; thus among prisoners, the best attendants on religious worship are often the worst criminals. I do not, however, think it is always an act of conscious hypocrisy in bad men when they make pious professions, but rather that they are deeply conscious of the instability of their characters, and that they fly to devotion as a resource and consolation.
Galton, Inquiries into Human Faculty (1883) ↗ · ¶ 233 — quoted passage in context
[…] numbers of persons of both sexes, and have been astonished at the frequency with which I have been assured that they had no shrinking whatever from the sight of the wriggling mysterious reptile. Some persons, as is well known, make pets of them; moreover, I am told that there is no passage in Greek or Latin authors expressive of that form of horror which I myself feel, and which may be compared to what is said to be felt by hydrophobic sufferers at the undulating movements of water. There are numerous allusions in the classics to the venom fang or the crushing power of snakes, but not to an aversion inspired by its form and movement. It was the Greek symbol of Hippocrates and of healing. There is nothing of the kind in Hebrew literature, where the snake is figured as an attractive tempter. In Hindu fables the cobra is the ingenious and intelligent animal, corresponding to the fox in ours. Serpent worship was very widely spread. I therefore doubt whether the antipathy to the snake is very common among mankind, notwithstanding the instinctive terror that their sight inspires in monkeys.
3. The room that hated the word: the ethical movement’s war
The tier: documented context, not influence. Stapledon appears nowhere in Spiller’s history or Coit’s book (verified negatives), and nothing shows he read either; what the two texts document is the institutional memory and standing doctrine of the movement whose London flagship heard both lectures. The flagship’s §1 and §4 carry the room’s demography and the wing-war as lecture context; this chapter re-tells the war as a history of the word, which is this monograph’s business, and adds what the flagship’s format could not — the movement’s own answers to the question the word poses.
3.1 The war of the two wings
The organized ethical movement split, almost at birth, over whether ethics is a religion — and the opening battle was fought at South Place itself. Coit, elected to the renamed Society’s ministry in December 1887, conditioned his stay in 1891 on five proposals; the members’ meeting “negatived the motion ‘That it is desirable that Dr. Coit be ex-officio a member of all committees in this Society.’ Thereupon Dr. Coit unconditionally resigned,” effective 1 January 1892. His admirers, “eager to found a new spiritual home,” built the body that voted in 1914 — twenty-six to one — to become the Ethical Church (the original proposal on the table had been “The Church of the Empire”). Spiller documents its liturgy whole: a “pithy Statement of Belief” intoned by congregation, choir and cantor, the Ideal addressed as “The benign and mighty Father of man’s spirit,” a marble altar inscribed “An Altar to the Ideal,” and, among the 1914 principles, “God Indwelling in the British People” — with the held National Idealism volumes named as the basis of the service-book’s basis. The opposite wing had declared its position in the movement’s founding decade: the London Ethical Society’s aims were “religious in the sense that they are directed towards the purification and elevation of the ideal of Human Life,” but with no intention of founding a church — “It does not propose, as has been thought, to found a new religious worship.” By 1906 the Union had made neutrality doctrine: “The moral life involves neither acceptance nor rejection of belief in any deity, personal or impersonal, or in a life after death.”
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 484 · ¶ 938 · ¶ 1553 · ¶ 1645 · ¶ 1619 · ¶ 1675 · ¶ 1573 · ¶ 1648 · ¶ 111 · ¶ 146 · ¶ 1984 — quoted passages in context
The year following (1891/92) the Society passed through a grave crisis. Dr. Stanton Coit informed the Society that he could only remain its Minister if five proposals, which he specified, were accepted in substance. After discussion, followed by divisions protracted through two General Members’ meetings, his proposals were substantially accepted. One of these conditions, however, required ratification by a two-thirds majority in a meeting convened specially for the purpose. This meeting was duly held on 15th December 1891, but negatived the motion “ That it is desirable that Dr. Coit be ex-officio a member of all committees in this Society.” Thereupon Dr. Coit unconditionally resigned, his resignation to take effect ist January 1892.
In December 1891, as we learnt in Chapter II., Dr. Stanton Coit resigned his pastorate of the South Place Ethical Society. Not a few of those who had been among his admiring listeners at South Place Chapel, were consequendy eager to found a new spiritual home where
The final meeting concluded with carrying by 26 votes against i, the following consequential motion : “ That in Rule i of the Society the words the West London Ethical Society be replaced by Ethical Church.” Thus the West London Ethical Society became the Ethical Church, the original proposal having been that it should be called The Church of the Empire.
the following form. Some minutes before the Service begins, the organist plays a voluntary. On the speaker, the conductor, and the cantor (dressed in long black or red robes) entering, the congregation rises, the choir sings an introit, and the conductor then reads the Introductory Words. Then a canticle is chanted, the congregation participating. Then, the congregation resuming their seats, the conductor reads a Meditation, lasting some three minutes. This is followed by a two minutes’ period of silence. Then, the congregation rising, the pithy Statement of Belief, already quoted, is intoned. This is followed by an anthem, that by a lesson usually chosen and read by the speaker, that by a hymn (standing) and announcements, and that by an address of about 40 minutes* duration. After this the collection is taken whilst the organist plays; an anthem follows; then an invitation is extended to visitors to join the Church fellowship; and, the congregation rising, a hymn is sung, Dismissory Words are said, the choir sings an Amen or Blessing, and the congregation disperses or individuals come forward to converse with the speaker or for general conversation.’**' The Service occupies altogether about an hour and a half. All but the readings for the lessons are generally taken from Social Worship, which allows very considerable choice to the conductor and permits him to select appropriate passages in harmony with the discourse. But the conductor may also have recourse to other sources for his readings.
The benign and mighty Father of man’s spirit.
When we enter the semi-circular church, we note immediately in front of us an oak-panelled wall. The panelling reaches the height of the balustrade of the first gallery, the part of the wall behind the centrally placed pulpit being draped with a richly embroidered curtain. Above the panelling, or rather as part of it, is, in the centre, a framed tempera picture by Walter Crane, with the legend on the frame : “ Still the race of Hero Spirits pass the torch from hand to hand ”, words adapted from Charles Kingsley. (The pulpit, too, was designed by Walter Crane. “ His was also the general colour scheme of the interior of the Church, including the blue carpet in front of the pulpit and the gold-starred blue ceiling.”) Above this picture is a beautiful bust of Pallas Athene. The lower, central part of the panelling is replaced by a large pulpit, on the upper part of which we read the line from Wordsworth : ” Thanks to the human heart by which we live ”. On the right side of the pulpit, placed against the panelled wall, is a statue of Jesus the Christ and on the left one of Gautama the Buddha, each with appropriate quotations. To the left and right of Walter Crane’s picture, on the bare wall, is a caste relief by Lucca della Robbia. On the two extreme limits of the gallery in front, touching the panelled wall, are the busts of Socrates and Marcus Aurelius. (Thus West and East and Greece and Rome arc represented.) In the centre of the semi-circular space between the pulpit and the gallery stands, on a heavy blue carpet covering the whole floor space between the pulpit and the pews, a modern Skyess marble altar, with the following inscription for its four sides: An Altar to the Ideal / The True I The Beautiful f The Good, (This altar, designed by Mr. Vernon Hill, was provided during the year 1923/24.) There is much else of beauty to be noted in the Church, but here can only be mentioned a series of three stained glass windows, with Joan of Arc in the centre and Elizabeth Fry and Florence Nightingale to the right and left of her, and, in a corner of the Church, a modern shrine containing an ancient porcelain statue of Kwan-Yin, the Buddhist Goddess of Compassion, who, the legend says, refused to enter heaven so long as any one was denied admission.
X. God Indwelling in the British People. — ^Thc Power of Righteousness, expressing itself in the moral evolution of the British people and now moving with greater momentum than ever before towards a democracy of Social Justice as the goal of the Empire’s destiny, is God immanent, whom all British subjects should unite in revering and obeying.
But this basis of the Services at the Ethical Church has in turn a basis. In 1907 and 1908 respectively. Dr. Stanton Coit published National Idealism and a State Church and National Idealism and the Boo\ of Common Prayer, two portly volumes. Here he incisively, cogendy, and brilliantly argues both in favour of an ethical ritual and of ethical churches and of the reinterpretation of the ritual of the orthodox churches on humanistic and non-supernaturalistic lines. Only a lengthy summary could even faintly do justice to these closely reasoned volumes. Accordingly, the reader is referred to the two works the aim of which may be
The “ General Aim of the Society ”, as set out in the first Report and as reproduced below, is remarkable in several ways. It reinstates unequivocally the line of thought expressed in the July 1886 Statement. In fact, it emphasises both the negative and the positive aspects. “ In the pursuit of these aims the Ethical Society does not set out from any authoritative or merely traditional statement of the claims of morality. It believes that these claims rest upon the rational nature of man as a member of an organic spiritual community.” And the meaning of the term “ religious ”, which appeared three times in the original Statement of July and September 1886, in the possibly ambiguous expression “ moral and religious ”, is clearly fixed : “ The aims of the Society ”, we read, “ are religious in the sense that they are directed towards the purification and elevation of the ideal of Human Life.” Here we have the further implication that the object of the Society is not only religious but pracLical, since “ the aims of the Societv are . . . directed towards the purification and elevation of the ideal of Human Life.” The same idea is stressed in the first sentence of this new Statement : “ ... there is at
“ From this account of the aims and methods of the Society, it will be obvious that it does not propose to enter into competition with existing religious organisations. It does not propose, as has been thought, to found a new religious worship. It merely aims at disentangling what is distinctively moral from the more transient forms of doctrine and ritual in which it is embedded. At a time when these forms arc being subjected on all hands to a critical and destructive analysis, it is felt that such a disentanglement is of supreme importance and is specially incumbent upon those who have the moral education of young people entrusted to them.
** (g) The moral life involves neither acceptance nor rejection of belief in any deity, personal or impersonal, or in a life after death.
The war’s emotional engine, on the church side, was liturgical hunger, and Coit confesses it in print with a candour that makes the 1907 book more than a program. His diagnosis of freethought’s failure is the anti-rationalist charge entire: “Freethinkers have in the past never realised the supreme importance of concreting their humanitarian idealism into a cultus, into a fraternity, with assemblings and holy days.” And the confessional core is his account of visiting a Christian Science service and envying its temple “while the older Ethical Society had not a place of its own to lay its head,” leaving “mightily reinforced in the conviction that the ritual is the thing.” A movement that had expelled the superhuman discovered it still wanted everything the superhuman used to organize — the building, the calendar, the kneeling — and built it all again around man. That hunger, and its satisfaction by substitution, is the background against which the 1934 lecture’s austerity registers: Stapledon offered the room the object back, stripped of the apparatus; Coit had kept the apparatus and swapped the object.
Coit, National Idealism (1907) ↗ · ¶ 365 · ¶ 375 · ¶ 378 — quoted passages in context
If anyone wishes to know why humanitarian freethought has scarcely made any progress in two thousand years as an organising, nation-building force, let him not imagine that it is because it is inherently negative, disruptive, or destructive. Let him be well assured that it is because Freethinkers have in the past never realised the supreme importance of concreting their humanitarian idealism into a cultus, into a fraternity, with assemblings and holy days ; while on the other hand the champions of supernaturalistic religion have fully appreciated the necessity for such devices. In the past, rationalistic idealism has always been individualistic and non-aesthetic. It has always undervalued the debt which original minds owe to the common mind about them. It has always depreciated the artistic, poetic, and symbolic way of communicating ideas. It has always over-estimated the independent resources of the individual — especially of his reasoning powers. We have no evidence of the failure of a rationalistic idealism which was at the same time socialistic in spirit and symbolical in its methods of presentation. Accordingly we are justified in thinking that psychological socialism and ritualistic methods of propaganda would prove as powerful in the spread of naturalism as they have been in the perpetuation of supernaturalism. We have, therefore, reason to believe that whoever prepares a book of common humanitarian devotion, adequate for a scientific and democratic age, will do for the spread of humanistic religion such a service as Marconi or Edison or Lister or Pasteur has done for trade, commerce, and medical and sanitary art. Until the new idealism possesses its own manual of religious ritual, it cannot communicate effectively its
Science Church near Sloane Square. Its fine stone building had already attracted my eye — not to confess that it had stirred envy and bewilderment in my heart to see that this newest of the sects already possessedsuch a temple as its home, while the older Ethical Society had not a place of its own to lay its head. I entered the auditorium of this Christian Science Temple, with its chaste and simple style of architecture. I had known nothing whatever of the order of a Christian Science meeting. Imagine then the revelation it was to me, who for years had been drifting, by some inevitable train of logic and experience, into a realisation of the necessity for rites and ceremonies to supplement preaching, to find that here in the Christian Science churches there was no preaching at all. Reliance was placed exclusively upon a set and prescribed ritual.
almost hopeless, as I should have thought, a ritual full of variety and interest and yet centring in one dominant idea. At this meeting near Sloane Square two persons conducted the services. But not, in the old-fashioned manner, two men. Nor were they two women, for the inventors of this new ritual wished to avoid a monotony of tone and a suggestion of only one type of dual humanity. Here in the Christian Science Church a man and a woman, neither one more prominent than the other, conduct the services. They repeat alternately passages of equal length. Thus a rhythmic swing gave repose and sweep to the mental movement of the whole meeting. The woman read passages from Mrs Eddy's Science and Health. The man reinforced its utterances with kindred ones from the Bible. Yet no one passage was long enough to fatigue the attention. The whole Bible, Old and New Testaments, was drawn upon to buttress with its clear, simple, concrete insight and imagery the stilted rhetoric of the cryptic ebullitions of the modern prophetess. The hymns were sung, where possible, to familiar tunes. The Lord's Prayer was repeated by the assembled congregation. Then a moment's pause filled the meeting with that mystic sense of oneness which only social silence can engender into a perfect calm. As I went away from the meeting blest by its elevated influence, despite my rejection of every tenet of its metaphysics, I found myself mightily reinforced in the conviction that the ritual is the thing. National idealism needs what its disciples have all along till now been too dull to think of giving it. I said to myself : " This sectarian doctrine of the Christian Scientists, which takes a mental truth and physiological fact of limited range (the power of ideas to beget health, happiness and character) and insanely and dangerously extends it into a universal law, has been
What the church wing kept, across every document, was worship — re-aimed. Its recurring formula: “the moral ideal must be set up as the object of religious devotion — religion being allegiance to an object to which supreme devotion is regarded as due.” Coit’s late article “What do you mean by ‘God’?” gives the whole program in one line — “The detaching of the word God from the Source and the reattaching of it to whatever things are true, beautiful, and good” — and his 1907 book had already supplied the creedal sentence: “God must henceforth be identical with the Spirit of Man within nature,” with the democratic apotheosis to match (“Working men have been found to be men, which means they have been found to be gods”) and an approving quotation of a poem that ends “The god in man — for man — is God.” One precision keeps the 1934 lecture’s target honest: Coit’s God is not man-as-he-is but the ideal factor in man — “God is taken to be simply the moral ideal and the tendencies which make for its actualisation in human society on earth.” That is precisely the highbrow humanism of the lecture’s sheets 7–11 — worship of ideal humanity, not of men’s felt needs — so what Stapledon answered from that platform was the developed form of the position, not a straw man.
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 1542 · ¶ 1755 — quoted passages in context
3. — Since the claim of the good life upon us is supreme, the moral ideal must be set up as the object of religious devotion— religion being allegiance to an object to which supreme devotion is regarded as due.
“ The detaching of the word God from the Source and the reattaching of it to whatever things are true, beautiful, and good, is, I believe, the only way by which religion and science can be reconciled, and also the only way in which communal worship can be made consistent with individual liberty of thought.
Coit, National Idealism (1907) ↗ · ¶ 640 · ¶ 876 · ¶ 1273 · ¶ 695 — quoted passages in context
The current form of trust in invisible agents involves, besides the belief in Christ's conscious activity after his death, a form which in general has not been recognised as spiritism. For spiritism has always seemed to imply the belief in very many spirits, and Christian theologians have seemed to assume that if you cease to believe in spiritual pluralism, and recognise only one spirit, you have ceased to be a spiritist. But surely in the belief that there is an infinite, all-wise, omnipresent Creator, who exists and continues to operate, who every instant sustains by his will that which he first brought into being, we have spiritism par excellence. If the churches are to turn from trust in invisible agencies outside of society and to look for redemption only from within its own resources, they can no longer introduce the idea of a supernatural deity. God must henceforth be identical with the Spirit of Man within nature. The Creator of the universe, although he be a self-conscious personality, is not a member of human society. As in the case of every man after his death, so is it true of the Creator of the universe : there is no occasion whatever for denying his existence or doubting it, but the very moral sanity of society is at stake to insist that he is not a subject or object of rights or duties. A revising barrister would be legally and morally obliged to strike off his name, had it been entered, from any list of electors. Though he came
Social democracy is beginning at last to interpret itself psychologically and ethically. The result is that it is assuming the majesty of a religious revelation, revealing the better part of man to himself. But this revelation could not have come about were it not that now for more than a hundred years in the actual struggle of class with class the higher nature of man has been asserting itself and organising itself into a mighty power for social redemption. The people have risen up and thrown off tyrants. The high mountains have been brought low and the valleys have been raised. Working men have been found to be men, which means they have been found to be gods — self-reliant, defiant, creative, ready to die for the good. Even women for nigh a century have been growing conscious that no frailty of body, no handicap of physical function, can detract from the dignity and the ultimate assertion of the God in them. The poets of the
The god in man — for man — is God.
When miracle is wholly discarded and God is taken to be simply the moral ideal and the tendencies which make for its actualisation in human society on earth, the nation's ritual of religion must give the ethical factor in life the same pre-eminence as was given of old to God. If from the point of view of naturalistic humanism the character of Christ is as beautiful and helpful and instructive, compared with the characters of other men, as the supernaturalists suppose, then his pre-eminence will continue ; and the more it is appreciated, the more the conviction will spread that, whatever supernaturalists said to the contrary, the real cause of their loyalty to Jesus was his character, his moral insight, and the spiritual charm of his personality.
And one absence in the church wing’s worship matters as much as its object. This religion advertised itself as mystery-free. At the Epping Forest nature-services Coit “pictured Ethical religion as one of the open air, devoid of mystery and reserve, as free to all as the sunlight”; the hymn ran “Worship is not confined to words / In gloomy cells or cloisters dim.” Worship kept, mysterium expelled — the exact inverse of the lecture’s Otto-shaped object, whose apprehension is “mystery, majesty, formidableness, horror” before it is sweetness (“numinous” scores zero hits in Spiller’s entire history). The two wings therefore bracket the 1934 position between them: the rationalists refused worship and kept the daylight; the church wing kept worship and also kept the daylight. Nobody in the movement’s own record worships anything that could destroy him.
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 3270 · ¶ 3276 — quoted passages in context
At an indoor congress of the Union of Ethical Societies members were invited to join the Forest Gate Ethical Church in a service in the open air. Sunday, July 5th, 1903, a brilliant summer day, saw parties of Ethical folk arriving at Loughton. Morning ramblers, picnicing on their way, met an afternoon group at tea at Oak Hill Farm, Theydon Bois. After a fraternal meal, 170 sat amid bracken in a glade nearby, joined in Ethical hymns and listen^ to Dr. Coit who pictured Ethical religion as one of the open air, devoid of mystery and reserve, as free to all as the sunlight.
Worship is not confined to words In gloomy cells or cloisters dim.”
3.2 The room in 1934
By the lecture’s year the movement had shrunk around its flagship. Spiller’s preface counts “some 74 Ethical Societies” ever started and reports “At present there are 10 Ethical centres in existence”; against the decline, South Place: Conway Hall opened in 1929, “the new home of the Society hums with activity,” membership “nearly 600 in all.” Its temper was the hybrid the lecture needed: objects amended in 1930 to “the cultivation or [sic: of] a rational religious sentiment,” hymns sung but the congregation asked to “refrain from applause on Sunday mornings,” the discussion circle run “under the joint auspices of the Rationalist Press Association and the Society”; no minister since Conway’s second term ended in 1897, four rotating “official lecturers” with “nonofficial lecturers occupy[ing] the platform at frequent intervals” — the slot the visiting novelist filled. The flagship’s §1 draws the fuller picture (including the platform’s recent guests — Russell 1922, Haldane 1928, Julian Huxley 1930, on this lecture’s own themes); the point this chapter adds is lexical. When the sheets’ humanist creed assigns all worship to “the awakening spirit of man,” it is stating — nearly verbatim — the working theology of one wing of the room (“the Spirit of Man within nature,” “Father of man’s spirit”); the phrase was period currency and no channel is claimed, but the audience fit is exact. And when the title says superhumanism, it raises the one word both wings had only ever used for the enemy.
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 2581 · ¶ 563–564 · ¶ 564 · ¶ 557 · ¶ 566 · ¶ 512 — quoted passages in context
Thus, according to the Annual Reports of the Union, altogether some 74 Ethical Societies have been started, to the Union’s knowledge, in Great Britain, the earliest of a definite type being the London Ethical Society, founded in 1886. Of these 74 Societies, no less than 46 passed through the Union, the smallest number of federated Societies at any time being 4 (at the Union’s inception) and the largest, 26 (in 1905/6). At present there are 10 Ethical centres in existence — the ^uth Place Ethical Society, the Ethical Church, the South London Ethical Society, the Hampstead Ethical Institute, Wimbledon Ethical Society, the Women’s Group, the Forest Group, the Young People’s Group, the University College (London) Ethical Union, and the Manchester University Ethical Society. The more vigorous newcomers began and continued to multiply from 1901 to 1909. After that date, the number of groups diminished and during and, especially, after the War most of them succumbed to the adverse social conditions prevailing universally.
“ The Committee are pleased to report that the first full financial year at Conway Hall has more than justified the most optimistic expectations. The vision of those who agitated and worked, more than twenty years ago, for rebuilding, has materialised, and the new home of the Society hums with
activity. From October to April there is hardly an evening without some intellectual or social function. It is only necessary to mention the new activities which have y)rung into being since Conway Hall was opened, to realise the re-vivifying effect of a building possessing beauty of architecture and utility of design. The Joint Conway Discussion Circle, The Study Circle, The Poetry Reading Circle, ^e Sunday Afternoon ‘ At Homes ’, the Country Dance Class, all these attract members, new and old, and the other activities have acquired fresh life. The influx of new members and associates, chronicled in last year’s Report, continues, and we now number nearly 600 in all. As will be seen from the financial paragraph on a later page, the Treasurer’s accounts arc the most satisfactory for many years. The lettings have exceeded any estimate made when the probable income for Conway Hall was considered.”
activity. From October to April there is hardly an evening without some intellectual or social function. It is only necessary to mention the new activities which have y)rung into being since Conway Hall was opened, to realise the re-vivifying effect of a building possessing beauty of architecture and utility of design. The Joint Conway Discussion Circle, The Study Circle, The Poetry Reading Circle, ^e Sunday Afternoon ‘ At Homes ’, the Country Dance Class, all these attract members, new and old, and the other activities have acquired fresh life. The influx of new members and associates, chronicled in last year’s Report, continues, and we now number nearly 600 in all. As will be seen from the financial paragraph on a later page, the Treasurer’s accounts arc the most satisfactory for many years. The lettings have exceeded any estimate made when the probable income for Conway Hall was considered.”
“ At the Annual Meeting last year Mr. Delislc Burns [who joined the staff of South Place lecturers in 1918/19] expressed the opinion that if the Society is to attract new members, ‘ we have to experiment : experiment in the form of service; experiment in new methods; experiment in the social side of the Society. We have to modify our customs and traditions so that we may take a live institution into new surroundings.* Acting in the spirit of these suggestions, the Committee has made a number of experiments during the year under review. After careful consideration it was decided that, in view of the special interest taken by Mr. Delislc Burns in the Society’s work and the general appreciation of his discourses, arrangements should be made, subject to approval by the next Annual Meeting, for him to deliver at least 25 discourses during 1925. Experiments have also been made with regard to the music at the Sunday morning services by the occasional substitution of instrumental music for the hymns and anthems. Efforts have been made to improve the congregational singing by holding a practice at the close of the service. Arising out of the changes made, the Committee have thought it desirable to ask the congregation to refrain from applause on Sunday mornings.”
‘‘ The attendance at the Sunday morning services is maintained, and efforts are now being made to advertise them more widely. . . . The twenty-first Conway Memorial Lecture, delivered by Mr. Julian Huxley on October i, entitled ‘ Science, Religion and Human Nature ’, was certainly the most popular of the series. . . . On Sunday, September 28, a large gathering of members and friends of the Ethical Movement met at the Annual Soiree, when Prof. Graham Wallas spoke on ‘ Science and Ethics ’. The Sunday Concert Committee are to be congratulated on the successful completion of their 45th season. The artists give of their best and the crowded audiences arc attentive and enthusiastic. . . . Twenty-seven concerts were given, bringing the total to i,iio. The Conway Discussion Circle, arranged under the joint auspices of the Rationalist Press Association and the Society, has for the second year provided a most interesting series of discussions. . . . One of the most healthy signs of renewed vigour in the Society is the formation and rapid growth of the Study Circle. . . . The average attendance numbers over twenty.
Dissatisfied with the discontinuity in the lectures, the Committee arranged in 1899 with Mr. Herbert Burrows, Mr. J. A. Hobson, and Mr. John M. Robertson that they should confer among themselves and with the Committee upon the course of thought to be presented, and the subject and mode of treatment of the lectures, these three lecturers to occupy the greater number of the available Sundays. In 1901, the experiment started with a course of lectures on ‘‘ The Nineteenth Century ”. The scheme, in this form, was, however, found difficult to realise. Accordingly, from 1903/04, the speakers referred to simply took the place of a minister, speaking on any subject that appeared to them appropriate. With slight variants this scheme has been adhered to ever since, the present official lecturers being Dr. C. Delisle Burns, Mr. John A. Hobson, Mr. S. K. Ratcliffe, and Mr. John M. Robertson. But, as before, nonofficial lecturers occupy the platform at frequent intervals.
3.3 The reversal of the word — and the question of what he knew
Read against this institutional record — and the reading is the editors’, made with both texts on one desk — the 1934 lecture and the founding sermon answer each other point for point. The movement’s founding sermon had made two claims from the same platform: God is the human ideal projected outward, and appeal to the superhuman is degrading. The lecture concedes the first claim’s force at length (sheet 12’s psycho-analytic interlude — “not news to this room but its own founding gospel restated,” as the flagship puts it) and then denies that the concession settles anything, since the reduction dissolves the humanist’s own ideal on equal terms. And it meets the second claim by re-describing the superhuman: not a helper to supplicate — the sheets forbid petition as firmly as Coit did (“we must outgrow the craving for security & the desire to have salvation,” sheet 28) — but an Other to salute, from whom nothing is asked. The word returns purged of exactly the feature the movement had damned it for. Supplication was the target of Coit’s sentence; Stapledon’s superhumanism is supplication-free by construction. What remains — worship as recognition, “making a difference to life, to conduct” — is formally closer to the church wing’s practice than either party might have liked to admit; the fight is over the object, and over the mystery.
Whether any of that answering was aimed is a different claim, and the record will not carry it. No held document shows Stapledon reading Spiller or Coit, hearing the 1887 sentence quoted, or knowing the word’s forty-seven-year career in that room: he appears nowhere in either book (this chapter’s opening negatives), and nothing in his held letters, prose or sheets names either man. The point-for-point correspondence above is textual fact; the intent — a lecturer choosing the enemy’s word because it was the enemy’s — is not in evidence, and this monograph does not assert it. It is, however, a decidable question, and the evidence-classes that would decide it can be named. The pocket diaries: the 1933–34 diary’s back-page reading list documented this very season’s Otto (§7.1), and a note of Spiller, Coit, or the movement’s press would do the same for the word. The Monthly Record’s report of the evening: whether the lecturer or the chair remarked on the title. And any record of contact with the organized ethical movement before December 1934 — membership, correspondence, its periodicals. All three classes are already targets on the project’s outreach ledger (followups.md: the Liverpool diary windows, the Conway Hall Monthly Record file, now asked with this question attached). Until one of them speaks, the fact is the reversal, and the capture is a reading.
One more document closes the chapter, because it hands the 1946 sequel its title. Spiller records that the Union’s 1920 Conference of Modern Religious Thinkers posed as its formal problem “that the various humanist movements have not succeeded in their efforts to organise the ethical or religious life.” Is humanism enough? was the organized movement’s own standing anxiety, on its own record, a quarter-century before Stapledon re-asked it at Conway Hall. The juxtaposition is the record’s own: a visiting lecturer asked the movement’s standing question twice, twelve years apart, and was invited back — why the room kept inviting him, no held document says. The 1946 monograph reads that return; its verdict-formula (“Humanism Plus, Theism Minus”) is the word’s reversal completed in the movement’s own grammar — their noun kept, their negation reversed.
Spiller, Ethical Movement (1934) ↗ · ¶ 2810 — quoted passage in context
in Religion.” Papers by Dr. L. P. Jacks, M.A., Editor of the Hibbert Journal, Principal of Manchester College, Oxford, The Rev. W. Manning, M.A., and Mr. Phillip H. Thomas, I.S.O. The Problem for Discussion: “ If we recognise that the historic churches fail to maintain the church-going habit, and that the various humanist movements have not succeeded in their efforts to organise the ethical or religious life, is the explanation to be attributed to (a) defects in the churches and movements themselves; (b) the growth of new forms of mysticism; (c) changing social conditions; or (d) such counter-attractions as literature, drama, music, etc.? ” Dr. Jacks will speak on “ Ethical and Religious Teaching from the Learner’s End.”
4. The Life Force and its superman: Shaw and Bergson
The tier: documented interlocutors — the strongest non-manuscript documentation of any literary stream in this monograph, though with a stated ceiling: no held document ties any specific Shaw or Bergson text to the 1934 evening, and the lecture sheets name neither man. What the record holds instead is a chain of Stapledon’s own words about the doctrine, running from the trenches to the 1946 platform; the doctrine’s texts are all held; and the 1946 sheets’ verdicts turn out to be his own published verdicts compressed. This is the stream where “superhumanism” had a genuine rival -ism — a self-declared religion whose god was the coming man.
4.1 The documented chain
Four dates. January 1918, from an ambulance-unit billet: the same letter that sifts Nietzsche (§6.3) sets “Bergson” in the list of “great and so different books & men” who “all seem to contribute some definite idea that is gradually proving essential to the new faith” — and a convoy letter of the following winter reports the enthusiasm for Shaw directly: “Do you know GBS? He is a tonic, nay more. He upsets all one’s preconceived ideas about everything that matters” (the held OCR’s c/e slips corrected). c. 1926, the poem the biography preserves: “Nor Russell, Wells, nor Freud, nor Bernard Shaw gospelled as yet through dark suburbia” — Shaw ranked among the four gospellers of the modern spirit. c. 1928, the typescript “Thoughts on the Modern Spirit,” where Stapledon files Shaw and Wells together in a sentence that already contains the 1934 lecture’s whole cast: both share “the same sense that man’s real importance lies not in his individuality but in his instrumentality to the achievement of a goal which he himself has not yet clearly conceived,” a movement that directs itself “now in worship of a Life Force, now in loyalty to the awakening consciousness of man himself” — with the discrimination that “Shaw, like Meredith, is saved by humour from rigid sectarianism, and gropes sometimes beyond the moral view.” Worship of a Life Force or loyalty to awakening man: six years before South Place, in his own prose, the alternatives the lecture will refuse in favour of a third thing. 1939, Philosophy and Living, which expounds the doctrine under the sheets’ own label — “Behind evolution there must be some ‘élan vital’ or Life Force, making ever new experiments” — and prints the verdicts the 1946 platform will compress: “some of Bergson’s arguments are far from convincing; and his theories are unsatisfactory,” and, on the value question, “‘Good’ is not good because it is the goal of evolution; rather evolution is good (if it really is good) because its goal is something which we recognise as good.” When the 1946 sheets rule that the Life Force arguments are “unconvincing” and that “If there is a Life Force — it is subject to our moral judgement,” they are reading his own 1939 pages aloud (the 1946 monograph’s §2.5 makes the case in full).
Letters (1913–19) ↗ · ¶ 316 · ¶ 386 — quoted passages in context
[…] “holy” pair that are always soaking wet. Consequently it is a very long time since one had dry feet in the daytime. All these tragedies are nothing compared with the real tragedies of the world today, but all the same they are amazing. . . . Another Day. ... I have been reading Nietzsche’s “Also Sprach Zarathustra,” but in translation. It is annoyingly pompous, and its ideal is ludicrously egotistical; but it has brilliant truths in it here and there, and of course it is interesting to read what the Germans so often profess as their ideal, and to see how far they have really drifted from pure Nietzsche. It is a book to make one think, even if the thinking is often hostile to the author’s idea. And it is wonderful to see how all these great and so different books & men, like Nietzsche, Bergson, Mazzini, Meredith, Morris, Comte, Shelley, Swinburne, Browning, and even Carlyle—all seem to contribute some definite idea that is gradually proving essential to the new faith. It is like a game of patience—fitting in the cards in their right places. And in each case there seems to be so much that will not stand the test, that is not the real true truth, and just one brilliant idea that has been waited for by a puzzled world. . . . As to Conscription, dear, you know what I think, & think with ever surer confidence. You know what I think about the results of the Referendum. And you know how glad I am to think of your acting according to your own conviction in the matter, however profoundly we differ. Look! I feel very strongly about that subject, & in the future I may have to act on that feeling; yet somehow I love you better for being in the enemy’s camp. Lair, noble, and misguided enemy. Certainly one or other of us is misguided, and naturally I won’t believe it is I! I’ll snatch you from that false allegiance someday, or be convinced and convicted […]
[…] own book is eausing me mueh tribulation. It must be absolutely finished by the time I am demobilized, but unfortunately the eold weather is unpropitious. It is so nearly finished in substanee, but it needs a lot of work in revision and fair-eopying. . . , Later. Me voiei, eomfortably entrenehed in the new reading room, a long narrow ehamber with three windows, a fine fire, two tables, plenty of ehairs, and an assortment of erude prints representing hunting and shooting seenes. Never sinee the Convoy began has one been so eomfortable. It is quite a home. Beside me sits Bonham [Roger Carter] versifying, in front sits [Edward] Graee, our inimitable eook writing letters and his diary. By the fire is the Doe writing, and on the other side of the fire Pimm reading. (This all reads like the preliminary stage direetions of a Bernard Shaw play. Do you know CBS? He is a tonie, nay more. He upsets all one’s preeoneeived ideas about everything that matters.) On one of our walls is a highly respeetable eloek merrily tieking off the seeonds that still separate Agnes and Olaf. . . . This room bids fair to make writing and reading quite tolerable. I hope we stay here for a long time yet. The other room, the “joy room,” is mueh bigger than this, and is meant for making a noise in, for ehatter and singing and general rowdiness. I expeet that one will be very mueh used. There! That is all of that subjeet. What next? Oh yes. This afternoon I was formally presented with my eroix de guerre. The eeremony was simple. Brown, the seeond in eommand and aeting ehief, eame along while I was going to tea, dug a paeket out of his poeket and said, “Oh, glad Pve met you: I ean get rid of this.” A pieee of tissue paper enelosed the bauble, a bronze eross baeked by two erossed swords, with a tiny head […]
the held text is uncorrected OCR of the print edition, which often confuses c and e (“ehureh” for “church”); the excerpt is shown exactly as held.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 770 — quoted passage in context
Nor Russell, Wells, nor Freud, nor Bernard Shaw gospelled as yet through dark suburbia.
rare pieces (1908–49) ↗ · ¶ 59 · ¶ 60 — quoted passages in context
One poet of the movement is Meredith, with his devotion to the Spirit of Earth. And he also links it both with earlier romanticism and with a later classicism. He admired nature less for her appearance, as Wordsworth did, than for her vitality. And man he admired less for his individuality, as Browning did, than for being Earth's self-conscious intelligence. But Meredith is more than an apostle of the faith in Earth and Man. His Comic Spirit gropes towards the mood of detachment which I shall presently describe. Meanwhile we may note in Bernard Shaw and H. G. Wells the same dualism of good and evil grounded in the dynamic nature of life, the same fervent championship, the same sense that man's real importance lies not in his individuality but in his instrumentality to the achievement of a goal which he himself has not yet clearly conceived. These writers have contributed to the faith which inspires militant "Labour" today, which distinguishes so sharply between the elect and the damned, which claims from the individual a puritanical loyalty to a certain social ideal or formula, which in fact is the modem, popular, and social-democratic form of Calvinism. Shaw, like Meredith, is saved by humour from rigid sectarianism, and gropes sometimes beyond the moral view; but Wells is more strictly confined within his faith. Bertrand Russell in his social writings, and in spite of his professed ethical scepticism, sometimes assumes the mood of righteous indignation; but though he renders allegiance to the ideal of cultural development he is also detached, and capable of dispassionate salutation.
The movement of moral zeal, then, which directs itself now in worship of a Life Force, now in loyalty to the awakening consciousness of man himself, has many sources and many expressions; and sometimes it has seemed to promise a widespread though new-fangled "religious revival." Indeed for many persons it is in fact to-day a living religion. But it is not distinctive of the modern spirit, and its original minds belong to yesterday rather than to-day. Not that it is outworn; on the contrary it should make an extremely important contribution to the culture of to-morrow. Shame to us if we evade that whole- hearted obligation to the advancement of mentality on this planet. But there is also another and more difficult lesson to learn, a lesson which in our day at least, it is seldom possible to grasp at all save through complete disillusion from all our most cherished ends.
Philosophy and Living II (1939) ↗ · ¶ 572 · ¶ 589 — quoted passages in context
Something positive, Bergson thinks, is needed to explain the continued advance of life. Behind evolution there must be some "*élan vital*" or Life Force, making ever new experiments.
But, as we have seen, some of Bergson's arguments are far from convincing; and his theories are unsatisfactory. In particular they are open to the charge that they defeat themselves. They claim to prove that intellect is in principle a false guide, save in practical matters; but since they themselves are based on intellectual processes, their own conclusions must be invalid. The sweeping condemnation of intellect and praise of intuition, though a healthy reaction from crude intellectualism, is itself crude. As we have seen, intellect and intuition involve one another. Intellect itself moves by intuitive leaps, and intuition is often the outcome of preparatory intellectual work.
Philosophy and Living I (1939) ↗ · ¶ 669 — quoted passage in context
Such considerations are not really relevant to the truth or falsity of the theory. What matters is rather that we know very little of the causes and direction of evolution; while good and bad are experienced every day in our own lives. It is certainly arguable that what is intrinsically good is richness and depth of experience and fullness of creative living (if I may be pardoned a very vague phrase). It is true also that in some cases evolution has moved in that direction. It is even possible that there *is* some sort of bias in this direction in the universe. But to derive our moral experience from that bias is to derive the known from the unknown and problematical. "Good" is not good *because* it is the goal of evolution; rather evolution is good (if it really is good) because its goal is something which we recognise as good.
4.2 Man and Superman (1903): breeding as sacrament
Shaw’s play — held complete with the Revolutionist’s Handbook — is where the eugenic stream (§2) and the vitalist stream fuse into a religion. The Epistle Dedicatory states it as politics: “We must either breed political capacity or be ruined by Democracy”; “Being cowards, we defeat natural selection under cover of philanthropy: being sluggards, we neglect artificial selection under cover of delicacy and morality.” Don Juan in Hell makes it eschatology: “The great central purpose of breeding the race, ay, breeding it to heights now deemed superhuman”; the play’s last metaphysical word is Ana’s cry, “A father–a father for the Superman!” And the appended Handbook hardens it to a program: “The only fundamental and possible Socialism is the socialization of the selective breeding of Man,” all other progress dismissed as illusion. Galton’s marriage-arithmetic has become a sacrament: Shaw’s Superman is prospective, bred, and ours to make — and he is the religion’s god.
Shaw, Man and Superman (1903) ↗ · ¶ 28 · ¶ 1291 · ¶ 1378 · ¶ 1905 · ¶ 1888 — quoted passages in context
I do not know whether you have any illusions left on the subject of education, progress, and so forth. I have none. Any pamphleteer can show the way to better things; but when there is no will there is no way. My nurse was fond of remarking that you cannot make a silk purse out of a sow's ear, and the more I see of the efforts of our churches and universities and literary sages to raise the mass above its own level, the more convinced I am that my nurse was right. Progress can do nothing but make the most of us all as we are, and that most would clearly not be enough even if those who are already raised out of the lowest abysses would allow the others a chance. The bubble of Heredity has been pricked: the certainty that acquirements are negligible as elements in practical heredity has demolished the hopes of the educationists as well as the terrors of the degeneracy mongers; and we know now that there is no hereditary "governing class" any more than a hereditary hooliganism. We must either breed political capacity or be ruined by Democracy, which was forced on us by the failure of the older alternatives. Yet if Despotism failed only for want of a capable benevolent despot, what chance has Democracy, which requires a whole population of capable voters: that is, of political critics who, if they cannot govern in person for lack of spare energy or specific talent for administration, can at least recognize and appreciate capacity and benevolence in others, and so govern through capably benevolent representatives? Where are such voters to be found to-day? Nowhere. Promiscuous breeding has produced a weakness of character that is too timid to face the full stringency of a thoroughly competitive struggle for existence and too lazy and petty to organize the commonwealth co-operatively. Being cowards, we defeat natural selection under cover of philanthropy: being sluggards, we neglect artificial selection under cover of delicacy and morality.
DON JUAN. True; but since you have endured so much you may as well endure to the end. Long before this sterilization which I described becomes more than a clearly foreseen possibility, the reaction will begin. The great central purpose of breeding the race, ay, breeding it to heights now deemed superhuman: that purpose which is now hidden in a mephitic cloud of love and romance and prudery and fastidiousness, will break through into clear sunlight as a purpose no longer to be confused with the gratification of personal fancies, the impossible realization of boys' and girls' dreams of bliss, or the need of older people for companionship or money. The plain-spoken marriage services of the vernacular Churches will no longer be abbreviated and half suppressed as indelicate. The sober decency, earnestness and authority of their declaration of the real purpose of marriage will be honored and accepted, whilst their romantic vowings and pledgings and until-death-do-us-partings and the like will be expunged as unbearable frivolities. Do my sex the justice to admit, Senora, that we have always recognized that the sex relation is not a personal or friendly relation at all.
ANA. Not yet created! Then my work is not yet done. [Crossing herself devoutly] I believe in the Life to Come. [Crying to the universe] A father--a father for the Superman!
And so we arrive at the end of the Socialist's dream of "the socialization of the means of production and exchange," of the Positivist's dream of moralizing the capitalist, and of the ethical professor's, legislator's, educator's dream of putting commandments and codes and lessons and examination marks on a man as harness is put on a horse, ermine on a judge, pipeclay on a soldier, or a wig on an actor, and pretending that his nature has been changed. The only fundamental and possible Socialism is the socialization of the selective breeding of Man: in other terms, of human evolution. We must eliminate the Yahoo, or his vote will wreck the commonwealth.
Unfortunately the earnest people get drawn off the track of evolution by the illusion of progress. Any Socialist can convince us easily that the difference between Man as he is and Man as he might become, without further evolution, under millennial conditions of nutrition, environment, and training, is enormous. He can shew that inequality and iniquitous distribution of wealth and allotment of labor have arisen through an unscientific economic system, and that Man, faulty as he is, no more intended to establish any such ordered disorder than a moth intends to be burnt when it flies into a candle flame. He can shew that the difference between the grace and strength of the acrobat and the bent back of the rheumatic field laborer is a difference produced by conditions, not by nature. He can shew that many of the most detestable human vices are not radical, but are mere reactions of our institutions on our very virtues. The Anarchist, the Fabian, the Salvationist, the Vegetarian, the doctor, the lawyer, the parson, the professor of ethics, the gymnast, the soldier, the sportsman, the inventor, the political program-maker, all have some prescription for bettering us; and almost all their remedies are physically possible and aimed at admitted evils. To them the limit of progress is, at worst, the completion of all the suggested reforms and the levelling up of all men to the point attained already by the most highly nourished and cultivated in mind and body.
The play also supplies, decades in advance, the exact construction the 1946 sheets refuse. Don Juan’s moral centre derives value from the Force: “as long as I can conceive something better than myself I cannot be easy unless I am striving to bring it into existence or clearing the way for it. That is the law of my life. That is the working within me of Life’s incessant aspiration to higher organization, wider, deeper, intenser self-consciousness, and clearer self-understanding.” The criterion of “better” is not brought to the Force from outside; it is the Force working in him — heaven simply is service of its direction (“to be in hell is to drift: to be in heaven is to steer”). Sheet 11 of 1946 — the Life Force “subject to our moral judgement: is its direction good or bad?” — is the precise reversal of that sentence.
Shaw, Man and Superman (1903) ↗ · ¶ 1324 · ¶ 1343 — quoted passages in context
DON JUAN. On the contrary, here I have everything that disappointed me without anything that I have not already tried and found wanting. I tell you that as long as I can conceive something better than myself I cannot be easy unless I am striving to bring it into existence or clearing the way for it. That is the law of my life. That is the working within me of Life's incessant aspiration to higher organization, wider, deeper, intenser self-consciousness, and clearer self-understanding. It was the supremacy of this purpose that reduced love for me to the mere pleasure of a moment, art for me to the mere schooling of my faculties, religion for me to a mere excuse for laziness, since it had set up a God who looked at the world and saw that it was good, against the instinct in me that looked through my eyes at the world and saw that it could be improved. I tell you that in the pursuit of my own pleasure, my own health, my own fortune, I have never known happiness. It was not love for Woman that delivered me into her hands: it was fatigue, exhaustion. When I was a child, and bruised my head against a stone, I ran to the nearest woman and cried away my pain against her apron. When I grew up, and bruised my soul against the brutalities and stupidities with which I had to strive, I did again just what I had done as a child. I have enjoyed, too, my rests, my recuperations, my breathing times, my very prostrations after strife; but rather would I be dragged through all the circles of the foolish Italian's Inferno than through the pleasures of Europe. That is what has made this place of eternal pleasures so deadly to me. It is the absence of this instinct in you that makes you that strange monster called a Devil. It is the success with which you have diverted the attention of men from their real purpose, which in one degree or another is the same as mine, to yours, that has earned you the name of The Tempter. It is the fact that they are doing your will, or rather drifting with your want of will, instead of doing their own, that makes them the uncomfortable, false, restless, artificial, petulant, wretched creatures they are.
DON JUAN. Why, to be able to choose the line of greatest advantage instead of yielding in the direction of the least resistance. Does a ship sail to its destination no better than a log drifts nowhither? The philosopher is Nature's pilot. And there you have our difference: to be in hell is to drift: to be in heaven is to steer.
Most striking of all, the play stages the 1934 lecture’s opponent better than the opponent’s own party ever did. The Devil’s exit warning — “Beware of the pursuit of the Superhuman: it leads to an indiscriminate contempt for the Human. To a man, horses and dogs and cats are mere species, outside the moral world. Well, to the Superman, men and women are a mere species too” — is the humanist’s indictment of sheets 16–20, voiced inside the superhumanists’ own play thirty years before South Place. The two escapes from the warning mark the gulf better than any doctrine. Shaw’s Juan accepts the contempt — “I sing, not arms and the hero, but the philosophic man,” followed at once by “Of all other sorts of men I declare myself tired.” The 1934 lecture forbids it: the sheets’ double loyalty holds “the claims of altruism, & of the humanistic ideal” as “objects of practical loyalty. I ought to serve them unswervingly” — worship of the more-than-human fenced, explicitly, against contempt for the human. A superhumanism that licenses despising men and a superhumanism that forbids it are, whatever their shared vocabulary, opposite disciplines.
Shaw, Man and Superman (1903) ↗ · ¶ 1360 · ¶ 1234 — quoted passages in context
THE DEVIL. Ay, Rembrandt. There a something unnatural about these fellows. Do not listen to their gospel, Senor Commander: it is dangerous. Beware of the pursuit of the Superhuman: it leads to an indiscriminate contempt for the Human. To a man, horses and dogs and cats are mere species, outside the moral world. Well, to the Superman, men and women are a mere species too, also outside the moral world. This Don Juan was kind to women and courteous to men as your daughter here was kind to her pet cats and dogs; but such kindness is a denial of the exclusively human character of the soul.
DON JUAN. Commander: I do not mean the military man. When the military man approaches, the world locks up its spoons and packs off its womankind. No: I sing, not arms and the hero, but the philosophic man: he who seeks in contemplation to discover the inner will of the world, in invention to discover the means of fulfilling that will, and in action to do that will by the so-discovered means. Of all other sorts of men I declare myself tired. They're tedious failures. When I was on earth, professors of all sorts prowled round me feeling for an unhealthy spot in me on which they could fasten. The doctors of medicine bade me consider what I must do to save my body, and offered me quack cures for imaginary diseases. I replied that I was not a hypochondriac; so they called me Ignoramus and went their way. The doctors of divinity bade me consider what I must do to save my soul; but I was not a spiritual hypochondriac any more than a bodily one, and would not trouble myself about that either; so they called me Atheist and went their way. After them came the politician, who said there was only one purpose in Nature, and that was to get him into parliament. I told him I did not care whether he got into parliament or not; so he called me Mugwump and went his way. Then came the romantic man, the Artist, with his love songs and his paintings and his poems; and with him I had great delight for many years, and some profit; for I cultivated my senses for his sake; and his songs taught me to hear better, his paintings to see better, and his poems to feel more deeply. But he led me at last into the worship of Woman.
4.3 Back to Methuselah (1921): the religion declares itself
If any doubt remains that the Life Force circulated as a religion — the premise of both lectures’ prosecutions — Shaw’s own preface retires it: “Creative Evolution is already a religion, and is indeed now unmistakeably the religion of the twentieth century”; civilization “needs a religion as a matter of life or death”; the cycle is offered as “this my beginning of a Bible for Creative Evolution.” The preface even pleads guilty, in advance, to the 1946 sheets’ “a kind of theism” charge: the Church proclaimed “that God is ‘without body, parts, or passions,’ or, as we say, an Elan Vital or Life Force,” and “there is no question of a new religion, but rather of redistilling the eternal spirit of religion.” What the whole cycle never does is audit its deity: the nearest approach — “The power my brother calls God proceeds by the method of Trial and Error; and if we turn out to be one of the errors, we shall go the way of the mastodon” — lets the Force err but never lets it be judged, since error is whatever gets scrapped and the direction is good by definition.
Shaw, Back to Methuselah (1921) ↗ · ¶ 148 · ¶ 158 · ¶ 160 · ¶ 73 · ¶ 133 · ¶ 1055 — quoted passages in context
Creative Evolution is already a religion, and is indeed now unmistakeably the religion of the twentieth century, newly arisen from the ashes of pseudo-Christianity, of mere scepticism, and of the soulless affirmations and blind negations of the Mechanists and Neo-Darwinians. But it cannot become a popular religion until it has its legends, its parables, its miracles. And when I say popular I do not mean apprehensible by villagers only. I mean apprehensible by Cabinet Ministers as well. It is unreasonable to look to the professional politician and administrator for light and leading in religion. He is neither a philosopher nor a prophet: if he were, he would be philosophizing and prophesying, and not neglecting both for the drudgery of practical government. Socrates and Coleridge did not remain soldiers, nor could John Stuart Mill remain the representative of Westminster in the House of Commons even when he was willing. The Westminster electors admired Mill for telling them that much of the difficulty of dealing with them arose from their being inveterate liars. But they would not vote a second time for the man who was not afraid to break the crust of mendacity on which they were all dancing; for it seemed to them that there was a volcanic abyss beneath, not having his philosophic conviction that the truth is the solidest standing ground in the end. Your front bench man will always be an exploiter of the popular religion or irreligion. Not being an expert, he must take it as he finds it; and before he can take it, he must have been told stories about it in his childhood and had before him all his life an elaborate iconography of it produced by writers, painters, sculptors, temple architects, and artists of all the higher sorts. Even if, as sometimes happens, he is a bit of an amateur in metaphysics as well as a professional politician, he must still govern according to the popular iconography, and not according to his own personal interpretations if these happen to be heterodox.
In my own activities as a playwright I found this state of things intolerable. The fashionable theatre prescribed one serious subject: clandestine adultery: the dullest of all subjects for a serious author, whatever it may be for audiences who read the police intelligence and skip the reviews and leading articles. I tried slum-landlordism, doctrinaire Free Love (pseudo-Ibsenism), prostitution, militarism, marriage, history, current politics, natural Christianity, national and individual character, paradoxes of conventional society, husband hunting, questions of conscience, professional delusions and impostures, all worked into a series of comedies of manners in the classic fashion, which was then very much out of fashion, the mechanical tricks of Parisian 'construction' being _de rigueur_ in the theatre. But this, though it occupied me and established me professionally, did not constitute me an iconographer of the religion of my time, and thus fulfil my natural function as an artist. I was quite conscious of this; for I had always known that civilization needs a religion as a matter of life or death; and as the conception of Creative Evolution developed I saw that we were at last within reach of a faith which complied with the first condition of all the religions that have ever taken hold of humanity: namely, that it must be, first and fundamentally, a science of metabiology. This was a crucial point with me; for I had seen Bible fetichism, after standing up to all the rationalistic batteries of Hume, Voltaire, and the rest, collapse before the onslaught of much less gifted Evolutionists, solely because they discredited it as a biological document; so that from that moment it lost its hold, and left literate Christendom faithless. My own Irish eighteenth-centuryism made it impossible for me to believe anything until I could conceive it as a scientific hypothesis, even though the abominations, quackeries, impostures, venalities, credulities, and delusions of the camp followers of science, and the brazen lies and priestly pretensions of the pseudo-scientific cure-mongers, all sedulously inculcated by modern 'secondary education,' were so monstrous that I was sometimes forced to make a verbal distinction between science and knowledge lest I should mislead my readers. But I never forgot that without knowledge even wisdom is more dangerous than mere opportunist ignorance, and that somebody must take the Garden of Eden in hand and weed it properly.
I now find myself inspired to make a second legend of Creative Evolution without distractions and embellishments. My sands are running out; the exuberance of 1901 has aged into the garrulity of 1930; and the war has been a stern intimation that the matter is not one to be trifled with. I abandon the legend of Don Juan with its erotic associations, and go back to the legend of the Garden of Eden. I exploit the eternal interest of the philosopher's stone which enables men to live for ever. I am not, I hope, under more illusion than is humanly inevitable as to the crudity of this my beginning of a Bible for Creative Evolution. I am doing the best I can at my age. My powers are waning; but so much the better for those who found me unbearably brilliant when I was in my prime. It is my hope that a hundred apter and more elegant parables by younger hands will soon leave mine as far behind as the religious pictures of the fifteenth century left behind the first attempts of the early Christians at iconography. In that hope I withdraw and ring up the curtain.
Our scornful young scientific and philosophic lions of today must not blame the Church of England for this confusion of thought. In 1562 the Church, in convocation in London 'for the avoiding of diversities of opinions and for the establishment of consent touching true religion,' proclaimed in their first utterance, and as an Article of Religion, that God is 'without body, parts, or passions,' or, as we say, an _Elan Vital_ or Life Force. Unfortunately neither parents, parsons, nor pedagogues could be induced to adopt that article. St John might say that 'God is spirit' as pointedly as he pleased; our Sovereign Lady Elizabeth might ratify the Article again and again; serious divines might feel as deeply as they could that a God with body, parts, and passions could be nothing but an anthropomorphic idol: no matter: people at large could not conceive a God who was not anthropomorphic: they stood by the Old Testament legends of a God whose parts had been seen by one of the patriarchs, and finally set up as against the Church a God who, far from being without body, parts, or passions, was composed of nothing else, and of very evil passions too. They imposed this idol in practice on the Church itself, in spite of the First Article, and thereby homeopathically produced the atheist, whose denial of God was simply a denial of the […]
Since the discovery of Evolution as the method of the Life Force the religion of metaphysical Vitalism has been gaining the definiteness and concreteness needed to make it assimilable by the educated critical man. But it has always been with us. The popular religions, disgraced by their Opportunist cardinals and bishops, have been kept in credit by canonized saints whose secret was their conception of themselves as the instruments and vehicles of divine power and aspiration: a conception which at moments becomes an actual experience of ecstatic possession by that power. And above and below all have been millions of humble and obscure persons, sometimes totally illiterate, sometimes unconscious of having any religion at all, sometimes believing in their simplicity that the gods and temples and priests of their district stood for their instinctive righteousness, who have kept sweet the tradition that good people follow a light that shines within and above and ahead of them, that bad people care only for themselves, and that the good are saved and blessed and the bad damned and miserable. Protestantism was a movement towards the pursuit of a light called an inner light because every man must see it with his own eyes and not take any priest's word for it or any Church's account of it. In short, there is no question of a new religion, but rather of redistilling the eternal spirit of religion and thus extricating it from the sludgy residue of temporalities and legends that are making belief impossible, though they are the stock-in-trade of all the Churches and all the Schools.
CONRAD. We know this about Him with absolute certainty. The power my brother calls God proceeds by the method of Trial and Error; and if we turn out to be one of the errors, we shall go the way of the mastodon and the megatherium and all the other scrapped experiments.
The cycle’s far terminus is worth one paragraph here, because it is the era’s most popular picture of what the bred-and-willed higher life is for, and because Last and First Men reads point for point as its refusal (comparison-tier — the only “Methuselah” in the Stapledon corpus is a publisher’s advertising page). Shaw’s Ancients hatch from eggs with “four years of childhood,” find the body “intolerable,” and aim at a vortex — “there will be no people, only thought,” “And that will be life eternal” — under Lilith’s closing guarantee: “It is enough that there is a beyond,” and her seed “shall one day fill it and master its matter to its uttermost confines.” A beyond guaranteed and owned in advance. The Last Men dilate childhood into centuries, decline immortality, and report — of the very goal Lilith promises — “We know now that this goal is not to be attained, since man’s end is imminent.” The 1930 novel had already passed its verdict on Shaw’s kind of faith in one sentence: “The conflict between this worship and the intransigent loyalty to Life, embattled against Death, proved insoluble.” Shaw’s religion is the intransigent loyalty to Life, deified; there is no second light in it.
Shaw, Back to Methuselah (1921) ↗ · ¶ 2438 · ¶ 2870 · ¶ 2871 · ¶ 2988 — quoted passages in context
THE SHE-ANCIENT. That is one of the funny words the newly born bring with them out of the past. You will forget it tomorrow. Now listen. You have four years of childhood before you. You will not be very happy; but you will be interested and amused by the novelty of the world; and your companions here will teach you how to keep up an imitation of happiness during your four years by what they call arts and sports and pleasures. The worst of your troubles is already over.
THE SHE-ANCIENT. The day will come when there will be no people, only thought.
THE HE-ANCIENT. And that will be life eternal.
[…] than they have killed hope and faith, and perished from the earth; and I may not spare them for ever. I am Lilith: I brought life into the whirlpool of force, and compelled my enemy, Matter, to obey a living soul. But in enslaving Life's enemy I made him Life's master; for that is the end of all slavery; and now I shall see the slave set free and the enemy reconciled, the whirlpool become all life and no matter. And because these infants that call themselves ancients are reaching out towards that, I will have patience with them still; though I know well that when they attain it they shall become one with me and supersede me, and Lilith will be only a legend and a lay that has lost its meaning. Of Life only is there no end; and though of its million starry mansions many are empty and many still unbuilt, and though its vast domain is as yet unbearably desert, my seed shall one day fill it and master its matter to its uttermost confines. And for what may be beyond, the eyesight of Lilith is too short. It is enough that there is a beyond. [_She vanishes_].
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 652 · ¶ 38 — quoted passages in context
We know now that this goal is not to be attained, since man's end is imminent. 3. A RACIAL AWAKENING
There were other causes. The peoples from whom sprang Socrates and Jesus were also among the first to conceive admiration for Fate. In Greek tragic art and Hebrew worship of divine law, as also in the Indian resignation, man experienced, at first very obscurely, that vision of an alien and supernal beauty, which was to exalt and perplex him again and again throughout his whole career. The conflict between this worship and the intransigent loyalty to Life, embattled against Death, proved insoluble. And though few individuals were ever clearly conscious of the issue, the first human species was again and again unwittingly hampered in its spiritual development by this supreme perplexity.
Bergson must be untangled from Shaw, because the 1946 sheets attack a composite and the held texts show which part came from whom. The name itself is Shaw’s: “Life Force” occurs zero times in Mitchell’s held translation, whose term is “the vital impetus”; the label the sheets attack — and the label Philosophy and Living’s own section-title uses, welding the two (“’élan vital’ or Life Force”) — is the currency Man and Superman minted. So is the superman: Creative Evolution contains the word once, and it looks backward, not forward — “It is as if a vague and formless being, whom we may call, as we will, man or superman, had sought to realize himself, and had succeeded only by abandoning a part of himself on the way” — the virtual whole at the origin, scattered into the actual species; nothing in the held text breeds a coming higher man. Indeed Bergson forbids the future-directed Force outright: “But radical finalism is quite as unacceptable, and for the same reason… It substitutes the attraction of the future for the impulsion of the past” — a Life Force with a goal is, for Bergson, mechanism upside down. What his book does have is a God-page — “God thus defined, has nothing of the already made; He is unceasing life, action, freedom” — a limited, struggling, world-making God, which is why the 1946 “kind of theism” charge is not unfair even to him; and a value-vocabulary that never moralizes (“success is the most general criterion of superiority”), never asking whether the current’s direction deserves allegiance. Stapledon had that objection in print by 1929 — A Modern Theory of Ethics warns against deriving good from “a ‘life force’ in the world,” since “no one would ever be persuaded that goodness is identical with survival-value” — and Philosophy and Living demonstrably built its Bergson exposition on this very book, quoting “gnaws into the future” and reproducing the rocket image.
Bergson, Creative Evolution (1911) ↗ · ¶ 475 · ¶ 110 · ¶ 457 · ¶ 281 · ¶ 71 — quoted passages in context
From our point of view, life appears in its entirety as an immense wave which, starting from a centre, spreads outwards, and which on almost the whole of its circumference is stopped and converted into oscillation: at one single point the obstacle has been forced, the impulsion has passed freely. It is this freedom that the human form registers. Everywhere but in man, consciousness has had to come to a stand; in man alone it has kept on its way. Man, then, continues the vital movement indefinitely, although he does not draw along with him all that life carries in itself. On other lines of evolution there have traveled other tendencies which life implied, and of which, since everything interpenetrates, man has, doubtless, kept something, but of which he has kept only very little. _It is as if a vague and formless being, whom we may call, as we will_, man _or_ superman, _had sought to realize himself, and had succeeded only by abandoning a part of himself on the way_. The losses are represented by the rest of the animal world, and even by the vegetable world, at least in what these have that is positive and above the accidents of evolution.
But radical finalism is quite as unacceptable, and for the same reason. The doctrine of teleology, in its extreme form, as we find it in Leibniz for example, implies that things and beings merely realize a programme previously arranged. But if there is nothing unforeseen, no invention or creation in the universe, time is useless again. As in the mechanistic hypothesis, here again it is supposed that _all is given_. Finalism thus understood is only inverted mechanism. It springs from the same postulate, with this sole difference, that in the movement of our finite intellects along successive things, whose successiveness is reduced to a mere appearance, it holds in front of us the light with which it claims to guide us, instead of putting it behind. It substitutes the attraction of the future for the impulsion of the past. But succession remains none the less a mere appearance, as indeed does movement itself. In the doctrine of Leibniz, time is reduced to a confused perception, relative to the human standpoint, a perception which would vanish, like a rising mist, for a mind seated at the centre of things.
[…] which is unmaking itself, and that the unforeseen forms which life cuts out in it, forms capable of being themselves prolonged into unforeseen movements, represent the action that is making itself. Now, I have every reason to believe that the other worlds are analogous to ours, that things happen there in the same way. And I know they were not all constructed at the same time, since observation shows me, even to-day, nebulae in course of concentration. Now, if the same kind of action is going on everywhere, whether it is that which is unmaking itself or whether it is that which is striving to remake itself, I simply express this probable similitude when I speak of a centre from which worlds shoot out like rockets in a fireworks display--provided, however, that I do not present this centre as a _thing_, but as a continuity of shooting out. God thus defined, has nothing of the already made; He is unceasing life, action, freedom. Creation, so conceived, is not a mystery; we experience it in ourselves when we act freely. That new things can join things already existing is absurd, no doubt, since the _thing_ results from a solidification performed by our understanding, and there are never any things other than those that the understanding has thus constituted. To speak of things creating themselves would therefore amount to saying that the understanding presents to itself more than it presents to itself--a self-contradictory affirmation, an empty and vain idea. But that action increases as it goes on, that it creates in the measure of its advance, is what each of us finds when he watches himself act. Things are constituted by the instantaneous cut which the understanding practices, at a given moment, on a flux of this kind, and what is mysterious when we compare the cuts together becomes clear when we relate them […]
It is unquestionable, for example, that _success_ is the most general criterion of superiority, the two terms being, up to a certain point, synonymous. By success must be understood, so far as the living being is concerned, an aptitude to develop in the most diverse environments, through the greatest possible variety of obstacles, so as to cover the widest possible extent of ground. A species which claims the entire earth for its domain is truly a dominating and consequently superior species. Such is the human species, which represents the culminating point of the evolution of the vertebrates. But such also are, in the series of the articulate, the insects and in particular certain hymenoptera. It has been said of the ants that, as man is lord of the soil, they are lords of the sub-soil.
There is, moreover, no stuff more resistant nor more substantial. For our duration is not merely one instant replacing another; if it were, there would never be anything but the present--no prolonging of the past into the actual, no evolution, no concrete duration. Duration is the continuous progress of the past which gnaws into the future and which swells as it advances. And as the past grows without ceasing, so also there is no limit to its preservation. Memory, as we have tried to prove,[3] is not a faculty of putting away recollections in a drawer, or of inscribing them in a register. There is no register, no drawer; there is not even, properly speaking, a faculty, for a faculty works intermittently, when it will or when it can, whilst the piling up of the past upon the past goes on without relaxation. In reality, the past is preserved by itself, automatically. In its entirety, probably, it follows us at every instant; all that we have felt, thought and willed from our earliest infancy is there, leaning over the present which is about to join it, pressing against the portals of consciousness that would fain leave it outside. The cerebral mechanism is arranged just so as to drive back into the unconscious almost the whole of this past, and to admit beyond the threshold only that which can cast light on the present situation or further the action now being prepared--in short, only that which can give _useful_ work. At the most, a few superfluous recollections may succeed in smuggling themselves through the half-open door. These memories, messengers from the unconscious, remind us of what we are dragging behind us unawares. But, even though we may have no distinct idea of it, we feel vaguely that our past remains present to us. What are we, in fact, what is our _character_, if not the condensation of the history that we have lived from our birth--nay, even before our birth, since we bring with us prenatal dispositions? Doubtless we think with only a small part of our past, but it is with our entire past, including the original bent of our soul, that we desire, will and act. Our past, then, as a whole, is made manifest to us in its impulse; it is felt in the form of tendency, although a small part of it only is known in the form of idea.
A Modern Theory of Ethics (1929) ↗ · ¶ 217 — quoted passage in context
ESSENTIALS OF THE CONCRETE IDEAL 207 other. It is therefore very difficult in the midst of our conflicting loyalties to realize that ‘ideals ’ are one and all judgments of the Ideal, be they never so erroneous. It would be interesting to embark on a detailed study of all the types of ‘ideals’ that men have entertained, and to show how in each case a real and important objective need has come to be espoused and over-emphasized at the expense of other needs equally important. But here I can only mention a few of the main conclusions that such a discussion would reach, so that we may be forewarned against certain extravagances of ideal-mongering, and may at the same time note certain very diverse principles, all of which must be taken into account in attempting to envisage the outlines of the objective ideal. Thus, though we must not fall into the error of evolutionism, we may agree that the ideal must include whatever biological forces there be. The discovery of the biological evolution of ever more highly organized types of life suggested that the distinction between good and bad must be simply derived from the supposed fact that a ‘life force’ in the world was ever pressing toward greater complexity of living. Whereas in the older view good was thought to be derived from the will of God, the newer theory based it on the trend of Nature. In an age conscious of its ‘ pro- gress ’ this doctrine was plausible; in a decaying civiliza- tion, however, no one would ever be persuaded that goodness is identical with survival-value. Only because men supposed that evolution was in some manner directed toward more complex vitality and mentality, were they tempted to derive good therefrom, forgetful that the fulfilment of ‘ evolution’ is good only so long as it makes possible ever more complex activities upon ever higher planes of emergence. But though in this they erred, they were justified in identifying good with the fulfilment of the activities of active substances. In other accounts of the ideal we find the same mixture of chaff and grain. Thus, while we must not be deceived by hedonism and utilitarianism, neither must we deny that pleasure itself is a good to be sought for its own sake.
Philosophy and Living II (1939) ↗ · ¶ 583 — quoted passage in context
between events. If real time, or " duration," were to be speeded up, the system of relations would not reveal the fact, since they would remain the same. Clocks, like everything else, would go quicker. In distinction from mere " scientific time," duration itself is the continuous progress of the past which " gnaws into the future," and is lived through in our consciousness.
On one further point Bergson hedges where the 1934 position cuts, and the hedge is worth exhibiting because Star Maker reads like its interrogation (comparison-tier: no document shows the novel answering Bergson deliberately). Bergson denies the letter of anthropocentrism and keeps its spirit: “man might be considered the reason for the existence of the entire organization of life on our planet. But this would be only a manner of speaking”; it would be wrong to regard humanity “as pre-figured in the evolutionary movement” — and yet the organized world remains “the soil on which was to grow either man himself or a being who morally must resemble him.” Star Maker opens by putting exactly that residue to the question — was man “the growing point of the cosmical spirit,” or “one of many million growing points,” or “of no more importance in the universal view than rats in a cathedral?” — and answers by census: the conceit that intelligent worlds must be rare “proves ludicrously false.” The creative current, de-anthropized all the way down: even Bergson’s manner of speaking is a consolation the discipline strikes out.
Bergson, Creative Evolution (1911) ↗ · ¶ 346 · ¶ 474 · ¶ 476 — quoted passages in context
If, now, we should wish to express this in terms of finality, we should have to say that consciousness, after having been obliged, in order to set itself free, to divide organization into two complementary parts, vegetables on one hand and animals on the other, has sought an issue in the double direction of instinct and of intelligence. It has not found it with instinct, and it has not obtained it on the side of intelligence except by a sudden leap from the animal to man. So that, in the last analysis, man might be considered the reason for the existence of the entire organization of life on our planet. But this would be only a manner of speaking. There is, in reality, only a current of existence and the opposing current; thence proceeds the whole evolution of life. We must now grasp more closely the opposition of these two currents. Perhaps we shall thus discover for them a common source. By this we shall also, no doubt, penetrate the most obscure regions of metaphysics. However, as the two directions we have to follow are clearly marked, in intelligence on the one hand, in instinct and intuition on the other, we are not afraid of straying. A survey of the evolution of life suggests to us a certain conception of knowledge, and also a certain metaphysics, which imply each other. Once made clear, this metaphysics and this critique may throw some light, in their turn, on evolution as a whole.
It is in this quite special sense that man is the "term" and the "end" of evolution. Life, we have said, transcends finality as it transcends the other categories. It is essentially a current sent through matter, drawing from it what it can. There has not, therefore, properly speaking, been any project or plan. On the other hand, it is abundantly evident that the rest of nature is not for the sake of man: we struggle like the other species, we have struggled against other species. Moreover, if the evolution of life had encountered other accidents in its course, if, thereby, the current of life had been otherwise divided, we should have been, physically and morally, far different from what we are. For these various reasons it would be wrong to regard humanity, such as we have it before our eyes, as pre-figured in the evolutionary movement. It cannot even be said to be the outcome of the whole of evolution, for evolution has been accomplished on several divergent lines, and while the human species is at the end of one of them, other lines have been followed with other species at their end. It is in a quite different sense that we hold humanity to be the ground of evolution.
From this point of view, the discordances of which nature offers us the spectacle are singularly weakened. The organized world as a whole becomes as the soil on which was to grow either man himself or a being who morally must resemble him. The animals, however distant they may be from our species, however hostile to it, have none the less been useful traveling companions, on whom consciousness has unloaded whatever encumbrances it was dragging along, and who have enabled it to rise, in man, to heights from which it sees an unlimited horizon open again before it.
Star Maker (1937) ↗ · ¶ 61 · ¶ 221 — quoted passages in context
Was man indeed, as he sometimes desired to be, the growing point of the cosmical spirit, in its temporal aspect at least? Or was he one of many million growing points? Or was mankind of no more importance in the universal view than rats in a cathedral? And again, was man's true function power, or wisdom, or love, or worship, or all of all these? Or was the idea of function, of purpose, meaningless in relation to the cosmos? These grave questions I would answer. Also I must learn to see a little more clearly and confront a little more rightly (so I put it to myself) that which, when we glimpse it at all, compels our worship.
The most numerous of all classes of intelligent worlds is that which includes the planet familiar to readers of this book. Homo sapiens has recently flattered and frightened himself by conceiving that, though perhaps he is not the sole intelligence in the cosmos, he is at least unique, and that worlds suited to intelligent life of any kind must be extremely rare. This view proves ludicrously false. In comparison with the unimaginable number of stars intelligent worlds are indeed very rare; but we discovered some thousands of worlds much like the Earth and possessed by beings of essentially human kind, though superficially they were often unlike the type that we call human. The Other Men were amongst the most obviously human. But in a later stage of our adventure, when our research was no longer restricted to worlds that had reached the familiar spiritual crisis, we stumbled on a few planets inhabited by races almost identical with Homo sapiens, or rather with the creature that Homo sapiens was in the earliest phase of his existence. These most human worlds we had not encountered earlier because, by one accident or another, they were destroyed before reaching the stage of our own mentality.
The upshot for the comparison: the creative-evolution superhumanism was two doctrines wearing one name — Bergson’s metaphysics of an undirected creative current, and Shaw’s religion of the bred and willed next man — and Stapledon’s documented engagement runs through both, with the verdicts differentiated exactly as the materials deserve. Against Bergson: unconvincing arguments, and the independence of ethics (the good judges evolution, not the reverse). Against Shaw: the worship is aimed at the wrong object — a future descendant, our own product, “man remaining man” perfected (the phrase belongs to §9’s Huxley, but the creed is continuous) — and it licenses the contempt the double loyalty forbids. One inversion is worth the margin: Bergson’s book ends with humanity as “one immense army galloping beside and before and behind each of us in an overwhelming charge able to beat down every resistance and clear the most formidable obstacles, perhaps even death.” The lecture ends with a man saluting what may destroy him. The charge and the salute are the two postures this whole shelf divides between.
Bergson, Creative Evolution (1911) ↗ · ¶ 479 — quoted passage in context
[…] intellect in intuition, many difficulties vanish or become light. But such a doctrine does not only facilitate speculation; it gives us also more power to act and to live. For, with it, we feel ourselves no longer isolated in humanity, humanity no longer seems isolated in the nature that it dominates. As the smallest grain of dust is bound up with our entire solar system, drawn along with it in that undivided movement of descent which is materiality itself, so all organized beings, from the humblest to the highest, from the first origins of life to the time in which we are, and in all places as in all times, do but evidence a single impulsion, the inverse of the movement of matter, and in itself indivisible. All the living hold together, and all yield to the same tremendous push. The animal takes its stand on the plant, man bestrides animality, and the whole of humanity, in space and in time, is one immense army galloping beside and before and behind each of us in an overwhelming charge able to beat down every resistance and clear the most formidable obstacles, perhaps even death.
5. The engineers: Haldane and Bernal
The tier: documented at both ends, and dated. Haldane is the one text in this monograph with a documented causal role in Stapledon’s fiction — the seed of Last and First Men’s expansion, on the biographer’s explicit finding and Haldane’s own guess. Bernal is a documented antagonist: he attacked Stapledon’s religion in print seven weeks before the South Place lecture, and Stapledon read it and said so. Between them the two Cambridge scientists define the stream the modern movement would later canonize as its ancestry (§9): transcendence of every human limit as an engineering project — no worship anywhere in it, and its authors proud of the absence.
5.1 Haldane’s Possible Worlds (1927): the documented seed
The chain runs unbroken from acquisition to platform. Crossley: the essay “The Last Judgment,” in the copy of Possible Worlds acquired in 1928, “had a far greater impact on the decision to extend” Last and First Men beyond its modest first outline than any other text — a “cornucopia of unelaborated but provocative guesses” around which “Olaf built entire episodes”; Stapledon’s annotated copy is in the Liverpool archive; and Haldane, reading the novel, “guessed that his own essay “The Last Judgment” had been an influence, and offered free consultations on the author’s next myth.” Moskowitz corroborates from the reception side, and adds the lecture-year detail: Waking World — the 1934 book whose central chapter the South Place lecture takes on the road — cites Possible Worlds in its bibliography. The lecture sheets themselves cite Haldane twice by name in the later 1940s sets (Science and Literature, sheet 3: “J.B.S. Haldane: Possible Worlds; fall of moon; Venus”), and the guesses can be walked into the novel in the held texts — the moon that “will one day approach the earth so close as to be broken up,” the Venus migration by “a deliberate evolution in that direction first accomplished on earth,” the synthesized bacteria after which “the previous life on that planet was destroyed.” (The flagship’s §3.3 and §4 walk the parallels; what this chapter takes from them is the stance question below.)
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 808 · ¶ 810 — quoted passages in context
More recent works also made an impact. In 1923, Stapledon read Wells's *Outline of History* and in 1927 J. W. Dunne's *Experiment in Time*, the first a model of synoptic and generalizing history and the second an investigation of telepathy that challenged the commonsense metaphor of time's arrow. He also read Gerald Heard's *Ascent of Humanity*, but found its notions of psychological evolution unreliable. An essay acquired in 1928, during the early phase of *Last and First Men*'s composition, had a far greater impact on the decision to extend the book beyond the relatively modest confines of the outline in “The Future Speaks”: J. B. S. Haldane's “The Last Judgment.” Haldane's speculative apocalypse is a cornucopia of unelaborated but provocative guesses and fancies about the future, around many of which Olaf built entire episodes—the depletion of fossil fuels and the destruction of the earth by its disintegrating moon, the development of new human senses and the abolition of pain through eugenic manipulation, the terraforming of Venus and the fashioning of a stumpy dwarf humanity to colonize Jupiter.[24]
If its epic and historical claims and its status as myth were uppermost in the author's mind, it was the scientific boldness of *Last and First Men* that captivated its stunned first readers, many of whom did not recognize the author's name. From London the poet A. S. J. Tessimond wrote, "You've made time, man, mind thrilling, and damned few people have done that." John Dover Wilson, the WEA inspector turned Shakespearean editor, was distracted from all other work for four days: "You have invented a new kind of book & the world of Einstein & Jeans is ready for it." Haldane the geneticist found the science of *Last and First Men* "unimpeachable," assumed incorrectly that Stapledon worked in a research laboratory, guessed that his own essay "The Last Judgment" had been an influence, and offered free consultations on the author's next myth. Haldane's sister Naomi Mitchison was "entranced" and "didn't read anything else, even the daily paper, till I'd finished it." The astronomer Arthur Eddington "appreciated equally the wisdom of its sense and the subtlety of its nonsense." Julian Huxley, just having collaborated with Wells on the massive *Science of Life*, sent an effusive message: "The blend of imagination and scientific plausibility is more than Wellsian!" Three readings convinced the novelist L. H. Myers that no one "deals with the immensities with such judgment." Gerald Heard, thrilled to find a book that treated his pet interests in telepathy and group consciousness with scientific rigor, wrote four times to Stapledon within a month and used his connections in London newspaper circles to turn himself into a one-man publicity machine for the book.[26]
Moskowitz (1979) ↗ · ¶ 10 — quoted passage in context
[…] Stapledon’s papers (which are willed to the University of Liverpool) his wife wisely insists on retaining until her death. "What is the sense of visiting the home of Olaf Stapledon if the soul and spirit have been removed?" she asks. "People who have some regard, some love, some feeling for his work can secure small satisfaction in seeing just the physical walls and furniture of his rooms. But to find his library, scrapbooks, diaries and papers actually still in place is something else again. The real essence of the man remains. The nature of some of the serious works he read and which are in his library is shown in the bibliography of his second book of philosophy, Waking World, published by Methuen in 1934. These are categorized under the following headings: To-Day and the World-Aim, Human Personality, Art, Science, History, Philosophy, and Religion. It is of particular interest to note that Haldane’s Possible Worlds is cited. The preface to Waking World reveals that Stapledon could accept criticism and was willing to rewrite when necessary, for he twice refers to a rejected earlier version of the book and credits five people for helping him revise it into acceptable shape: these included his wife Agnes; E.V. Rieu, a long-time friend and an editor at Methuen; and Professor L.C. Martin of Liverpool University. He had similarly credited all these three, and in addition Gerald Heard, in the preface to his second work of fiction, Last Men in London. (Heard was to become an important writer of detective stories and science fiction.) This book, originally published by Methuen on October 27, 1932, was reissued at a lower price in 1934; the printings were small, and copies soon became difficult to find. Perhaps the fact that more than half of it was devoted to the origins, execution, and aftermath of World War I, told […]
Haldane, Possible Worlds (1927) ↗ · ¶ 634 · ¶ 658 · ¶ 660 — quoted passages in context
Now, here the sybil who described the future to Odin was substantially in agreement with modern astronomy. The moon will one day approach the earth so close as to be broken up, and very possibly to destroy the earth’s surface features. Certain Mohammedan theologians have interpreted the first verse of the Sura called ‘The Moon,’ ‘The hour is come and the moon is split,’ as referring to the end of the world. But outside Scandinavia the prophets of doom have generally described the stars as falling out of heaven, which is an impossibility, for the same reason that a million elephants cannot fall on one fly. They are too large.
‘A few hundred thousand of the human race, from some of whom we are descended, determined that though men died, man should live for ever. It was only possible for humanity to establish itself on Venus if it were able to withstand the heat and want of oxygen there prevailing, and this could only be done by a deliberate evolution in that direction first accomplished on earth. Enough was known of the causes responsible for evolution to render the experiment possible. The human material was selected in each generation. All who were not willing were able to resign from participation, and among those whose descendants were destined for the conquest of Venus a tradition and an inheritable psychological disposition grew up such as had not been known on earth for twenty-five million years. The psychological types which had been common among the saints and soldiers of early history were revived. Confronted once more with an ideal as high as that of religion, but more rational, a task as concrete as and infinitely greater than that of the patriot, man became once more capable of self-transcendence. Those members of mankind who were once more evolving were not happy. They were out of harmony with their surroundings. Disease and crime reappeared among them. For disease is only a failure of bodily function to adjust itself to the environment, and crime a similar failure in behaviour. But disease and crime, as much as heroism and martyrdom, are part of the price which must be paid for evolution. The price is paid by the individual, and the gain is to the race. Among ourselves an individual may not consider his own interests a dozen times in his life. To our ancestors, fresh from the pursuit of individual happiness, the price must often have seemed too great, and in every generation many who have now left no descendants refused to pay it.
‘In the course of ten thousand years a race had been evolved capable of life at one-tenth of the oxygen pressure prevalent on earth, and the body temperature had been raised by six degrees. The rise to a still higher temperature, correlated as it was with profound chemical and structural changes in the body, was a much slower process. Projectiles of a far larger size were dispatched to Venus. Of 1734, only 11 made satisfactory landings. The crews of the first two of these ultimately perished; those of the next eight were our ancestors. The organisms found on Venus were built of molecules which were mostly mirror images of those found in terrestrial bodies. Except as sources of fat they were therefore useless for food, and some of them were a serious menace. The third projectile to arrive included bacteria which had been synthesized on earth to attack l-glucose and certain other components of the organisms on Venus. Ten thousand years of laboratory work had gone to their making. With their aid the previous life on that planet was destroyed, and it became available for the use of man and the sixty terrestrial species which he had brought with him.
Two of the seed’s fingerprints deserve exhibiting here, because they show influence and correction in a single gesture. The frame first: Haldane’s myth “will be broadcast to infants on the planet Venus some forty million years hence” — a far-future document rendered for present readers — and Last and First Men’s Introduction makes that device structural: “THIS book has two authors,” the Last Man dictating through the First. And then the moon, where the borrowing splits along the two men’s theologies. In Haldane the moon falls because the descendants engineered it — “The tides were therefore employed, and gradually became the main source of energy” — an apocalypse that is a bill for imprudence. Stapledon takes the physics and plants it as episode-furniture (the First Men forbid tide-engines because tidal motion “had come to be regarded as sacred”; a later civilization’s “unbridled waste of tidal energy” perturbs the moon’s orbit) — and then, when his moon falls, strips the mechanism out: the Fifth Men investigate and find nothing; “It was as though a fiend out of some ancient myth had come to life in the modern world.” Haldane’s universe sends invoices; Stapledon’s sends fate. The theological difference between the two writers is visible in orbital mechanics.
Haldane, Possible Worlds (1927) ↗ · ¶ 636 · ¶ 641 — quoted passages in context
So I have suggested the only means which, so far as I can see, would be able to speed up the catastrophe. The account given here will be broadcast to infants on the planet Venus some forty million years hence. It has been rendered very freely into English, as many of the elementary ideas of our descendants will be beyond our grasp:—
‘At this time the effect of tidal friction was to make each century, measured in days, just under a second shorter than the last. The friction occurred mainly in the Bering Sea between northern Asia and America. As soon as the use of heat engines was discovered, man began to oxidize the fossil vegetables to be found under the earth’s surface. After a few centuries they gave out, and other sources of energy were employed. The power available from fresh water was small, from winds intermittent, and that from the sun’s heat only available with ease in the tropics. The tides were therefore employed, and gradually became the main source of energy. The invention of synthetic food led to a great increase in the world’s population, and after the federation of the world it settled down at about twelve thousand million. As tide engines were developed, an ever-increasing use was made of their power; and before the human race had been in existence for a million years, the tide-power utilized aggregated a million million horse-power. The braking action of the tides was increased fiftyfold, and the day began to lengthen appreciably.
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 20 · ¶ 195 · ¶ 442 · ¶ 553 — quoted passages in context
THIS book has two authors, one contemporary with its readers, the other an inhabitant of an age which they would call the distant future. The brain that conceives and writes these sentences lives in the time of Einstein. Yet I, the true inspirer of this book, I who have begotten it upon that brain, I who influence that primitive being's conception, inhabit an age which, for Einstein, lies in the very remote future.
Much of the power needed to keep this civilization in being was drawn from the buried remains of prehistoric vegetation, in the form of coal. Although after the foundation of the World State the fuel of Antarctica had been very carefully husbanded, the new supply of oil had given out in less than three centuries, and men were forced to drive their aeroplanes by electricity generated from coal. It soon became evident, however, that even the unexpectedly rich coal-fields of Antarctica would not last for ever. The cessation of oil had taught men a much needed lesson, had made them feel the reality of the power problem. At the same time the cosmopolitan spirit, which was learning to regard the whole race as compatriots, was also beginning to take a broader view temporally, and to see things with the eyes of remote generations. During the first and sanest thousand years of the World State, there was a widespread determination not to incur the blame of the future by wasting power. Thus not only was there serious economy (the first large-scale cosmopolitan enterprise), but also efforts were made to utilize more permanent sources of power. Wind was used extensively. On every building swarms of windmills generated electricity, and every mountain range was similarly decorated, while every considerable fall of water forced its way through turbines. More important still was the utilization of power derived from volcanos and from borings into the subterranean heat. This, it had been hoped, would solve the whole problem of power, once and for all. But even in the earlier and more intelligent period of the World State inventive genius was not what it had been, and no really satisfactory method was found. Consequently at no stage of this civilization did volcanic sources do more than supplement the amazingly rich coal seams of Antarctica. In this region coal was preserved at far greater depths than elsewhere, because, by some accident, the earth's central heat was not here fierce enough (as it was elsewhere) to turn the deeper beds into graphite. Another possible source of power was known to exist in the ocean tides; but the use of this was forbidden by the S.O.S. because, since tidal motion was so obviously astronomical in origin, it had come to be regarded as sacred.
[…] Once, early in the history of the species, and before its nature had become fixed, there occurred a non-industrial civilization of a genuinely intellectual kind, almost like that of Greece. Sometimes, but not often, the third human species fooled itself into an extravagantly industrial world civilization, in the manner of the Americanized First Men. In general its interest was too much concerned with other matters to become entangled with mechanical devices. But on three occasions at least it succumbed. Of these civilizations one derived its main power from wind and falling water, one from the tides, one from the earth's internal heat. The first, saved from the worst evils of industrialism by the limitations of its power, lasted some hundred thousand years in barren equilibrium, until it was destroyed by an obscure bacterium. The second was fortunately brief; but its fifty thousand years of unbridled waste of tidal energy was enough to interfere appreciably with the orbit of the moon. This world-order collapsed at length in a series of industrial wars. The third endured a quarter of a million years as a brilliantly sane and efficient world organization. Throughout most of its existence there was almost complete social harmony with scarcely as much internal strife as occurs in a bee-hive. But once more civilization came at length to grief, this time through the misguided effort to breed special human types for specialized industrial pursuits. Industrialism, however, was never more than a digression, a lengthy and disastrous irrelevance in the life of this species. There were other digressions. There were for instance cultures, enduring sometimes for several thousand years, which were predominantly musical. This could never have occurred among the First Men; but, as was said, the third species was peculiarly […]
Man looked upon his future home with loathing, and on his birthplace with an affection which became passionate. With its blue sky, its incomparable starry nights, its temperate and varied continents, its ample spaces of agriculture, wilderness and park, its well-known beasts and plants, and all the material fabric of the most enduring of terrestrial civilizations, it seemed to the men and women who were planning flight almost a living thing imploring them not to desert it. They looked often with hate at the quiet moon, now visibly larger than the moon of history. They revised again and again their astronomical and physical theories, hoping for some flaw which should render the moon's observed behaviour less mysterious, less terrifying. But they found nothing. It was as though a fiend out of some ancient myth had come to life in the modern world, to interfere with the laws of nature for man's undoing.
5.2 The super-organism and the Race deity
For this monograph the essay’s terminus matters more than its furniture. Haldane’s forty-million-year Venusians are a deliberately bred collective whose members live “under the influence of the voice of the community” as “components of a super-organism or deity, possibly the only one in space-time” — with pity bred out, defined away as “an unpleasant feeling aroused by the suffering of other individuals,” and Earth’s destruction filed as “an episode of entirely negligible importance. And there are other galaxies.” Most telling of all, Haldane recovers religion’s psychology inside racial purpose: “Confronted once more with an ideal as high as that of religion, but more rational… man became once more capable of self-transcendence.” That is a superhumanism in the fullest sense this monograph tracks — a more-than-human object of devotion, complete with sacrifice arithmetic (“the value of the individual is negligible in comparison with that destiny”) — and it is precisely the shape the 1934 lecture’s herd-worship and Race-deity arguments exist to forbid: sheet 20’s “(ð mystical Race deity)” names the fascist form, but Haldane’s Venus is the same deity in a lab coat. The corpus had answered five years before the lecture: Last and First Men’s Martian cloud — a genuine super-organism, worshipped from inside — is diagnosed in exactly these terms, its members’ loyalty “squandered upon something which was not greater than themselves in mental calibre, but only in mere bulk.” Bulk is not divinity; a bigger us is still us. The seed-text relationship makes the divergence the more legible: Stapledon took Haldane’s episodes and refused Haldane’s god.
Haldane, Possible Worlds (1927) ↗ · ¶ 661 · ¶ 659 · ¶ 668 · ¶ 658 · ¶ 678 — quoted passages in context
‘The history of our planet need not be given here. After the immense efforts of the first colonizers, we have settled down as members of a super-organism with no limits to its possible progress. The evolution of the individual has been brought under complete social control, and besides enormously enhanced intellectual powers we possess two new senses. The one enables us to apprehend radiation of wave-lengths between 100 and 1200 metres, and thus places every individual at all moments of life, both asleep and awake, under the influence of the voice of the community. It is difficult to see how else we could have achieved as complete a solidarity as has been possible. We can never close our consciousness to those wave-lengths on which we are told of our nature as components of a super-organism or deity, possibly the only one in space-time, and of its past, present, and future. It appears that on earth the psychological equivalent of what is transmitted on these wave-lengths included the higher forms of art, music, and literature, the individual moral consciousness, and, in the early days of mankind, religion and patriotism. The other wave-lengths inform us of matters which are not the concern of all at all times, and we can shut them out if we so desire. Their function is not essentially different from that of instrumental radio-communication on earth. The new magnetic sense is of less importance, but is of value in flying and otherwise in view of the very opaque character of our atmosphere. It would have been almost superfluous on earth. We have also recovered the pain sense, which had become vestigial on earth, but is of value for the survival of the individual under adverse circumstances, and hence to the race. So rapid was our evolution that the crew of the last projectile to reach Venus were incapable of fertile unions with our inhabitants, and they were therefore used for experimental purposes.
‘The modes of behaviour which our ancestors gradually overcame, and which only recur as the rarest aberrations among ourselves, included not only such self-regarding sentiments as pride and a personal preference concerning mating. They embraced emotions such as pity (an unpleasant feeling aroused by the suffering of other individuals). In a life completely dedicated to membership of a super-organism the one is as superfluous as the other, though altruism found its place in the emotional basis of the far looser type of society prevalent on earth.
‘About 250 million years hence our solar system will pass into a region of space in which stars are far denser than in our present neighbourhood. Although not more than one in ten thousand is likely to possess planets suitable for colonization, it is considered possible that we may pass near enough to one so equipped to allow an attempt at landing. If by that time the entire matter of the planets of our system is under conscious control, the attempt will stand some chance of success. Whereas the best time between the earth and Venus was one-tenth of a terrestrial year, the time taken to reach another stellar system would be measured in hundreds or thousands of years, and only a very few projectiles per million would arrive safely. But in such a case waste of life is as inevitable as in the seeding of a plant or the discharge of spermatozoa or pollen. Moreover, it is possible that under the conditions of life in the outer planets the human brain may alter in such a way as to open up possibilities inconceivable to our own minds. Our galaxy has a probable life of at least eighty million million years. Before that time has elapsed it is our ideal that all the matter in it available for life should be within the power of the heirs of the species whose original home has just been destroyed. If that ideal is even approximately fulfilled, the end of the world which we have just witnessed was an episode of entirely negligible importance. And there are other galaxies.’
‘A few hundred thousand of the human race, from some of whom we are descended, determined that though men died, man should live for ever. It was only possible for humanity to establish itself on Venus if it were able to withstand the heat and want of oxygen there prevailing, and this could only be done by a deliberate evolution in that direction first accomplished on earth. Enough was known of the causes responsible for evolution to render the experiment possible. The human material was selected in each generation. All who were not willing were able to resign from participation, and among those whose descendants were destined for the conquest of Venus a tradition and an inheritable psychological disposition grew up such as had not been known on earth for twenty-five million years. The psychological types which had been common among the saints and soldiers of early history were revived. Confronted once more with an ideal as high as that of religion, but more rational, a task as concrete as and infinitely greater than that of the patriot, man became once more capable of self-transcendence. Those members of mankind who were once more evolving were not happy. They were out of harmony with their surroundings. Disease and crime reappeared among them. For disease is only a failure of bodily function to adjust itself to the environment, and crime a similar failure in behaviour. But disease and crime, as much as heroism and martyrdom, are part of the price which must be paid for evolution. The price is paid by the individual, and the gain is to the race. Among ourselves an individual may not consider his own interests a dozen times in his life. To our ancestors, fresh from the pursuit of individual happiness, the price must often have seemed too great, and in every generation many who have now left no descendants refused to pay it.
Man’s little world will end. The human mind can already envisage that end. If humanity can enlarge the scope of its will as it has enlarged the reach of its intellect, it will escape that end. If not, the judgment will have gone out against it, and man and all his works will perish eternally. Either the human race will prove that its destiny is in eternity and infinity, and that the value of the individual is negligible in comparison with that destiny, or the time will come
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 379 — quoted passage in context
This would not have been amiss, had the mind of the race, into which he so frequently awoke under the influence of the general radiation, been indeed a mind of higher rank than his own. But it was not. It was but a pooling of the percipience and thought and will of the cloudlets. Thus it was that the superb loyalty of the Martians was squandered upon something which was not greater than themselves in mental calibre, but only in mere bulk.
Two further Haldane items bind this chapter to its neighbours. The book’s Epilogue cites Alexander’s Space, Time and Deity by name — “the emergence of a new kind of being which will bear the same relation to mind as do mind to life and life to matter” — beside its own definition of religion as “an emotional attitude towards the universe as a whole”: emergent deity plus cosmic emotion, §7’s professional metaphysics in twenty popular pages, in a book Stapledon owned and annotated in 1928. (Haldane’s gloss already commits the conversion Alexander forbade — the super-organism as deity — a warning example the lecture does not follow.) And the title essay’s famous close — “the universe is not only queerer than we suppose, but queerer than we can suppose,” with the invitation “to look at existence from the point of view of non-human minds” — is the program Last and First Men’s Introduction executes and the 1934 sheets’ epistemology assumes: the Other exceeds the instrument. The two men shared the discipline of cosmic scale and the refusal of consolation; they split, permanently, on what is owed the summit. In 1935 the split went both ways at once, in the exchange the flagship’s §3.11 preserves: Haldane damned Odd John’s great-man politics (“the kind which leads people to fascism”) while himself being the 1927 laureate of the ant-heap — each man refusing the other’s rejected deity.
Haldane, Possible Worlds (1927) ↗ · ¶ 677 · ¶ 674 · ¶ 611 — quoted passages in context
I do not see how any one who has accepted the view of the universe presented by astronomy and geology can suppose that its main purpose is the preparation of a certain percentage of human souls for so much of perfection and happiness as is possible for them. This may be one of its purposes, but it can hardly be the most important. Events are taking place ‘for other great and glorious ends’ which we can only dimly conjecture. Professor Alexander, for example, in _Space, Time, and Deity_, suggests that the end towards which ‘the whole creation groaneth and travaileth’ is the emergence of a new kind of being which will bear the same relation to mind as do mind to life and life to matter. It is the urge towards this which finds its expression in the higher forms of religion. Without necessarily accepting such a view, one can express some of its implications in a myth. The numerical side of the myth is, I believe, correct, though whether tidal power could be utilized to the extent that I have suggested is a question for the engineers of the future.
For one of the essential elements of religion is an emotional attitude towards the universe as a whole. As we come to realize the tiny scale, both temporal and spatial, of the older mythologies, and the unimaginable vastness of the possibilities of time and space, we must attempt to conjecture what purposes may be developed in the universe that we are beginning to apprehend. Our private, national, and even international aims are restricted to a time measured in human life-spans.
I greatly doubt if they will be made by professional philosophers. And though to-day the theoretical physicist is and ought to be the principal type of world-builder, the biologist will one day come to his own in this respect. And one day man will be able to do in reality what in this essay I have done in jest, namely, to look at existence from the point of view of non-human minds. Bergson has of course made this attempt, but not, as it seems to me, very successfully. Success is, indeed, impossible in view of our present ignorance of animal psychology, and that is why a purely speculative essay like the present can claim some degree of justification at this moment. Our only hope of understanding the universe is to look at it from as many different points of view as possible. This is one of the reasons why the data of the mystical consciousness can usefully supplement those of the mind in its normal state. Now, my own suspicion is that the universe is not only queerer than we suppose, but queerer than we _can_ suppose. I have read and heard many attempts at a systematic account of it, from materialism and theosophy to the Christian system or that of Kant, and I have always felt that they were much too simple. I suspect that there are more things in heaven and earth than are dreamed of, or can be dreamed of, in any philosophy. That is the reason why I have no philosophy myself, and must be my excuse for dreaming.
5.3 Bernal’s The World, the Flesh and the Devil (1929): transcendence as engineering
Bernal’s eighty-page programme is the stream at maximum purity: the three enemies of the rational soul — world, flesh, devil — each to be defeated by technique. Space colonization against the World (“Imagine a spherical shell ten miles or so in diameter”), and beyond it the maximal escalation: man “will not ultimately be content to be parasitic on the stars but will invade them and organize them for his own purposes”; the stars “will be turned into efficient heat engines.” Against the Flesh, the mechanized post-organic body — “After all it is brain that counts” — the brain re-housed as “a completely effective, mentally-directed mechanism,” compound minds by nerve-to-nerve connection (“the multiple individual would be, barring cataclysmic accidents, immortal”), the horror granted and overridden: “a strange, monstrous and inhuman creature, but he is only the logical outcome of the type of humanity that exists at present,” for “Normal man is an evolutionary dead end; mechanical man, apparently a break in organic evolution, is actually more in the true tradition of a further evolution.” At the limit, humanity “becoming masses of atoms in space communicating by radiation, and ultimately perhaps resolving itself entirely into light”; behind it, the species split by “the aristocracy of scientific intelligence,” with unimproved mankind kept on earth as “a human zoo, a zoo so intelligently managed that its inhabitants are not aware that they are there merely for the purposes of observation and experiment.”
Bernal, World, Flesh and Devil (1929) ↗ · ¶ 19 · ¶ 29 · ¶ 30 · ¶ 36 · ¶ 38 · ¶ 44 · ¶ 43 · ¶ 47 · ¶ 65 · ¶ 69 — quoted passages in context
Imagine a spherical shell ten miles or so in diameter, made of the lightest materials and mostly hollow; for this purpose the new molecular materials would be admirably suited. Owing to the absence of gravitation its construction would not be an engineering feat of any magnitude. The source of the material out of which this would be made would only be in small part drawn from the earth; for the great bulk of the structure would be made out of the substance of one or more smaller asteroids, rings of Saturn or other planetary detritus. The initial stages of construction are the most difficult to imagine. They will probably consist of attaching an asteroid of some hundred years or so diameter to a space vessel, hollowing it out and using the removed material to build the first protective shell. Afterwards the shell could be re-worked, bit by bit, using elaborated and more suitable substances and at the same time increasing its size by diminishing its thickness. The globe would fulfil all the functions by which our earth manages to support life. In default of a gravitational field it has, perforce, to keep its atmosphere and the greater portion of its life inside; but as all its nourishment comes in the form of energy through its outer surface it would be forced to resemble on the whole an enormously complicated single-celled plant.
As the globes multiplied they would undoubtedly develop very differently according to their construction and to the tendencies of their colonists, and at the same time they would compete increasingly both for the sunlight which kept them alive and for the asteroidal and meteoric matter which enabled them to grow. Sooner or later this pressure, or perhaps the knowledge of the imminent failure of the sun, would force some more adventurous colony to set out beyond the bounds of the solar system. The difficulty involved in making this jump is probably as great as that of leaving the earth itself. Interstellar distances are so large that high velocities, approaching those of light, would be necessary; and though high velocities would be easy to attain - it being merely a matter of allowing acceleration to accumulate - they would expose the space vessels to very serious dangers, particularly from dispersed meteoric bodies. A space vessel would, in fact, have to be a comet, ejecting from its anterior end a stream of gas which, meeting and vaporizing any matter in its path, would sweep it to the sides and behind in a luminous trail. Such a method would be very wasteful of matter, and one might perhaps count on some better one having been devised by that time. Even with such velocities journeys would have to last for hundreds and thousands of years, and it would be necessary - if man remains as he is - for colonies of ancestors to start out who might expect the arrival of remote descendants. This would require a self-sacrifice and a perfection of educational method that we could hardly demand at the present. However, once acclimatized to space living, it is unlikely that man will stop until he has roamed over and colonized most of the sidereal universe, or that even this will be the end. Man will not ultimately be content to be parasitic on the stars but will invade them and organize them for his own purposes.
A star is essentially an immense reservoir of energy which is being dissipated as rapidly as its bulk will allow. It may be that, in the future, man will have no use for energy and be indifferent to stars except as spectacles, but if (and this seems more probable) energy is still needed, the stars cannot be allowed to continue to in their old way, but will be turned into efficient heat engines. The second law of thermodynamics, as Jeans delights in pointing out to us, will ultimately bring this universe to an inglorious close, may perhaps always remain the final factor. But by intelligent organization the life of the universe could probably be prolonged to many millions of millions of times what it would be without organization. Besides, we are still too close to the birth of the universe to be certain about its death. In any case, long before these questions become urgent it would seem impossible not to assume that man himself would have changed radically in this environment and the nature of this change we must consider in the next chapter.
Take, as a starting point, the perfect man such as the doctors, the eugenists and the public health officers between them hope to make of humanity: a man living perhaps an average of a hundred and twenty years but still mortal, and increasingly feeling the burden of this mortality. Already Shaw in his mystical fashion cries out for life to give us hundreds of years to experience, learn and understand; but without the vitalist's faith in the efficacy of human will we shall have to resort to some artifice in order to achieve this purpose. Sooner or later some eminent physiologist will have his neck broken in a super-civilized accident or find his body cells worn beyond capacity for repair. He will then be forced to decide whether to abandon his body or his life. After all it is brain that counts, and to have a brain suffused by fresh and correctly prescribed blood is to be alive - to think. The experiment is not impossible; it has already been performed on a dog and that is three-quarters of the way towards achieving it with a human subject. But only a Brahmin philosopher would care to exist as an isolated brain, perpetually centered on its own meditations. Permanently to break off all communications with the world is as good as to be dead. However, the channels of communication are ready to hand. Already we know the essential electrical nature of nerve impulses; it is a matter of delicate surgery to attach nerves permanently to apparatus which will either send messages to the nerves or receive them. And the brain thus connected up continues an existence, purely mental and with very different delights from those of the body, but even now perhaps preferable to complete extinction. […]
The next stage might be compared to that of a chrysalis, a complicated and rather unpleasant process of transforming the already existing organs and grafting on all the new sensory and motor mechanisms. There would follow a period of re-education in which he would grow to understand the functioning of his new sensory organs and practise the manipulation of his new motor mechanism. Finally, he would emerge as a completely effective, mentally-directed mechanism, and set about the tasks appropriate to his new capacities. But this is by no means the end of his development, although it marks his last great metamorphosis. Apart from such mental development as his increased faculties will demand from him, he will be physically plastic in a way quite transcending the capacities of untransformed humanity. Should he need a new sense organ or have a new mechanism to operate, he will have undifferentiated nerve connections to attach to them, and will be able to extend indefinitely his possible sensations and actions by using successively different end-organs.
[…] minds would tend to become a more and more permanent condition until they functioned as a dual or multiple organism. The minds would always preserve a certain individuality, the network of cells inside a single brain being more dense than that existing between brains, each brain being chiefly occupied with its individual mental development and only communicating with the others for some common purpose. Once the more or less permanent compound brain came into existence two of the ineluctable limitations of present existence would be surmounted. In the first place death would take on a different and far less terrible aspect. Death would still exist for the mentally-directed mechanism we have just described; it would merely be postponed for three hundred or perhaps a thousand years, as long as the brain cells could be persuaded to live in the most favorable environment, but not forever. But the multiple individual would be, barring cataclysmic accidents, immortal, the older component as they died being replaced by newer ones without losing the continuity of the self, the memories and feelings of the older member transferring themselves almost completely to the common stock before its death. And if this seems only a way of cheating death, we must realize that the individual brain will feel itself part of the whole in a way that completely transcends the devotion of the most fanatical adherent of a religious sect. It is admittedly difficult to imagine this state of affairs effectively. It would be a state of ecstasy in the literal sense, and this is the second great alteration that the compound mind makes possible. Whatever the intensity of our feeling, however much we may strive to reach beyond ourselves or into another's mind, we are always barred by the limitations of our individuality. Here at least those barriers would be down: feeling would truly […]
The new man must appear to those who have not contemplated him before as a strange, monstrous and inhuman creature, but he is only the logical outcome of the type of humanity that exists at present. It may be argued that this tampering with bodily mechanisms is as unnecessary as it is difficult, that all the increase of control needed may be obtained by extremely responsive mechanisms outside the unaltered human body. But though it is possible that in the early stages a surgically transformed man would be at a disadvantage in capacity of performance to a normal, healthy man, he would still be better off than a dead man. Although it is possible that man has far to go before his inherent physiological and psychological make-up becomes the limiting factor to his development, this must happen sooner or later, and it is then that the mechanized man will begin to show a definite advantage. Normal man is an evolutionary dead end; mechanical man, apparently a break in organic evolution, is actually more in the true tradition of a further evolution.
The new life would be more plastic, more directly controllable and at the same time more variable and more permanent than that produced by the triumphant opportunism of nature. Bit by bit the heritage of the direct line of mankind - the heritage of the original life emerging on the face of the world - would dwindle, and in the end disappear effectively, being preserved perhaps as some curious relic, while the new life which conserves none of the substance and all of the spirit of the old would take its place and continue its development. Such a change would be as important as that in which life first appeared on the earth's surface and might be as gradual and imperceptible. Finally, consciousness itself may end or vanish in a humanity that has become completely etherealized, losing the close-knit organism, becoming masses of atoms in space communicating by radiation, and ultimately perhaps resolving itself entirely into light. That may be an end or a beginning, but from here it is out of sight.
[…] which there seemed a permanent gulf between it and other cultures or classes. Yet the gulf was not permanent; the particular aristocracy fell or its advantages spread themselves so widely that they became common stock. The cause for this is not obscure: first, the aristocrats differed only superficially from the many, and secondly they were not progressing themselves in such a way as to increase their distance and leave humanity behind. The present aristocracy of western culture, at the moment when it most clearly dominates the world, is being imitated rapidly and successfully in every eastern country. It is not on the lines of a cultural aristocracy or the formation of a class more able to lead the good life that the splitting of the human race is likely to occur; because such aristocracies are only reaching to a more complete humanity, and where they lead the race will follow. It is rather the aristocracy of scientific intelligence that may give rise to new developments. They have come down the earlier centuries, scattered singly or in small groups, but the mechanical revolution and its consequences have increased their number and at the same time their compactness. More and more, the world may be run by the scientific expert. The new nations, America, China and Russia, have begun to adapt to this idea consciously. Scientific bodies naturally are at first conceived of as advisory and they will probably never become anything else; but, with every advance in the direction of a more rational psychology, the power of advice will increase and that of force proportionately decrease. This development, coupled with the broadening of the idea of private interest to include, almost necessarily, some consideration of humanity, will tend to center real sovereignty in advisory bodies. The scientists would then have a dual function: […]
[…] leave humanity behind; from another, humanity - the humanity that counts - might seem to change en bloc, leaving behind in a relatively primitive state those too stupid or too stubborn to change. The latter view suggests another biological analogy: there may not be room for both types in the same world and the old mechanism of extinction will come into play. The better organized beings will be obliged in self-defense to reduce the numbers of the others, until they are no longer seriously inconvenienced by them. If, as we may well suppose, the colonization of space will have taken place or be taking place while these changes are occurring, it may offer a very convenient solution. Mankind - the old mankind - would be left in undisputed possession of the earth, to be regarded by the inhabitants of the celestial spheres with a curious reverence. The world might, in fact, be transformed into a human zoo, a zoo so intelligently managed that its inhabitants are not aware that they are there merely for the purposes of observation and experiment.
And Bernal, alone among the rivals in this monograph, diagnoses the 1934 position in advance, from the other side. His closing chapter observes that “all, even the least religious, retain in their minds when they think of the future, an idea of the deus ex machina, of some transcendental, superhuman event which will, without their help, bring the universe to perfection or destruction. We want the future to be mysterious and full of supernatural power” — and makes outgrowing that want the book’s final test. The want Bernal prescribes outgrowing is, almost clause for clause, the want the lecture disciplines into the salute: the difference is that Stapledon keeps the awe and strips the doctrine, where Bernal strips both. On Bernal’s own terms the salute is a residue of the deus ex machina; on the lecture’s terms Bernal’s programme is highbrow humanism with the windows painted over — or rather (the correction §6.1 will force on the window metaphor) opened as a sally-port.
Bernal, World, Flesh and Devil (1929) ↗ · ¶ 70 — quoted passage in context
That prospect should please both sides: it should satisfy the scientists in their aspirations towards further knowledge and further experience, and the humanists in their looking for the good life on earth. But somehow it fails by the very virtue of its being a possible and probable solutions on the lines of our own knowledge. We do not really expect or want the probable; all, even the least religious, retain in their minds when they think of the future, an idea of the deus ex machina, of some transcendental, superhuman event which will, without their help, bring the universe to perfection or destruction. We want the future to be mysterious and full of supernatural power; and yet these very aspirations, so totally removed from the physical world, have built this material civilization and will go on building it into the future so long as there remains any relation between aspiration and action. But can we count on this? Or, rather, have we not here the criterion which will decide the direction of human development? We are on the point of being able to see the effects of our actions and their probable consequences in the future; we hold the future still timidly, but perceive it for the first time, as a function of our own action. Having seen it, are we to to turn away from something that offends the very nature of our earliest desires, or is the recognition of our new powers sufficient to change those desires into the service of the future which they will have to bring about?
5.4 Seven weeks before the lecture
The contact is dated, two-directional, and raw. On 7 November 1934 Bernal reviewed Waking World in the Listener, and the biography preserves both the verdict — Stapledon accused “of demanding from science a mystical ‘beatific vision,’” his reduced religion hardly “worth preserving at all” — and the wound, in Stapledon’s letter of that January: “I’m afraid Waking World has damned me in the eyes of the scientists… they’re so sure of themselves.” Seven weeks after the review, Stapledon stood up at South Place and defended precisely the worship Bernal had ruled not worth preserving. The lecture never names him — but the fresh wound belongs in any account of the evening’s temper, and it makes the sequel the more remarkable: when Star Maker needed artificial planets, its preface thanked “Mr. J. D. Bernal’s fascinating little book” for them, and the borrowed globes are point-for-point Bernal’s. Engineering admired, worship withheld — the cleanest single formula for Stapledon’s relation to this whole stream. The two men shared platforms to the end (Wrocław 1948; Bernal saw him off at the airport for the New York peace congress in 1949); the disagreement of November 1934 was never, so far as the held record shows, retracted by either side.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 887 — quoted passage in context
Although Stapledon and Wells had real ideological and temperamental differences, a reviewer of *Waking World* noticed one remarkable similarity: "Mr. Stapledon is developing just as Mr. Wells did. He began by producing a firstrate scientific romance, 'Last and First Men,' corresponding to 'The Time Machine.' Now he has produced a non-fictional account of the world to which he hopes we are waking, just as Mr. Wells did in 'Anticipations.' "[27] Scientists, however, were as unenthusiastic about *Waking World* as was Wells. The physicist J. D. Bernal, whose work Olaf admired, thought it hopelessly, piously old-fashioned. He accused the author of demanding from science a mystical "beatific vision" without realizing that science did not pronounce on ultimate values. Stapledon was merely revisiting the Stoicism of the later Roman Empire, which blindly worshiped anything that exists simply because it exists: "No other religion may be possible to an intelligent and honest man in these days, but we may well ask whether religion which has lost so much of its content is worth preserving at all." The criticism wounded Olaf because he relished the praise scientific readers had heaped on *Last and First Men*. "I'm afraid *Waking World* has damned me in the eyes of the scientists. It's sad, because I have usually a dog-like respect for them. And yet—they're so *sure* of themselves."[28]
Star Maker (1937) ↗ · ¶ 12 · ¶ 430 — quoted passages in context
Certain ideas about artificial planets were suggested by Mr. J. D. Bernal's fascinating little book The World, the Flesh, and the Devil. I hope he will not strongly disapprove of my treatment of them.
The Symbiotics could well afford to leave these museum pieces intact, for they had at their disposal scores of planetary systems. Moreover, armed with their highly developed physical sciences and with sub-atomic power, they were able to construct, out in space, artificial planets for permanent habitation. These great hollow globes of artificial super-metals, and artificial transparent adamant, ranged in size from the earliest and smallest structures, which were no bigger than a very small asteroid, to spheres considerably larger than the Earth. They were without external atmosphere, since their mass was generally too slight to prevent the escape of gases. A blanket of repelling force protected them from meteors and cosmic rays. The planet's external surface, which was wholly transparent, encased the atmosphere. Immediately beneath it hung the photosynthesis stations and the machinery for generating power from solar radiation. Part of this outer shell was occupied by astronomical observatories, machinery for controlling the planet's orbit, and great "docks" for interplanetary liners. The interior of these worlds was a system of concentric spheres supported by girders and gigantic arches. Interspersed between these spheres lay the machinery for […]
The stream’s map, before the fiction: in Galton the higher life is bred within man; in Shaw it is bred and willed out of man; in Haldane it is bred into a collective that absorbs man; in Bernal it is engineered by a minority that ceases to be man. Four programs, one grammar — the superhuman as product. The 1934 lecture is not a fifth program. It is a different grammar altogether, and the literary supermen of §6 show the period’s imagination straining at the same boundary from inside fiction.
6. The literary supermen: Wells, Beresford — and Nietzsche behind them
Three tiers inside one chapter, and the honesty of the comparison depends on keeping them apart. Wells is a documented interlocutor — correspondence, shared societies, a verdict in Stapledon’s own 1928 prose, and (uniquely on this shelf) documented reception in the other direction, Wells naming Stapledon inside a novel — but for two of the three Wells titles read here, no document ties Stapledon to the specific book: the program is documented, the titles are comparison. Beresford is documented reception at full strength: the one precursor Stapledon acknowledged in print, in Odd John’s own preface. Nietzsche is strictly comparison-tier with one documented contact: a single wartime reading, verified in the letter itself, whose evidence will be quoted at its exact strength and no more.
6.1 Wells, three ways: 1905, 1923, 1937
The relationship first, since it frames all three books. Wells’s enthusiastic letter about Last and First Men opened a correspondence; Stapledon’s 1931 reply confessed “I have only read two of your scientific romances, The War of the Worlds, and The Star,” while acknowledging the rest as atmosphere — “A man does not record his debt to the air he breathes in common with everyone else.” Crossley’s caution governs everything in this section: “it was Wells the utopian and the public educator, not the romancer, whose forgiveness Olaf asked for wholesale borrowing.” And the collision was seasonal to the lecture: Stapledon joined the Wellsian utopian societies of 1934, warned their first public meeting (Caxton Hall, May 1934) against “scientists going the way of priests and becoming a hard and dogmatic caste,” and published in that same year the book that, in Crossley’s words, “subverted a central tenet of Wellsianism” — a secular Utopia “did not fulfill all human needs.” His own 1928 filing of Wells has been quoted (§4.1): the prophet of a faith that locates man’s importance “not in his individuality but in his instrumentality,” and — alone of the three prophets named there — “Wells is more strictly confined within his faith.”
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 834 · ¶ 835 · ¶ 879 · ¶ 885 — quoted passages in context
A book of mine, *Last and First Men*, has received a certain amount of attention, and nearly every review has contained some reference to yourself. Recently I have come to feel that if you happened to notice the book, a copy of which the publishers must have sent you, you might wonder why I had not the grace to make some acknowledgment of your influence. Of course it cannot matter to you whether a new writer admits his debt or not; and anyhow you may not have seen the book or the reviews. All the same I should like to explain. Your works have certainly influenced me very greatly, perhaps even more than I supposed when I was writing my own book. But curiously enough I have only read two of your scientific romances, *The War of the Worlds*, and *The Star*. If I seem to have plagiarized from any others, it was in ignorance. Your later works I greatly admire. There would be somethng very wrong with me if I did not. They have helped very many of us to see things more clearly. Then why, I wonder, did I not acknowledge my huge debt? Probably because it was so huge and obvious that I was not properly aware of it. A man does not record his debt to the air he breathes in common with everyone else. Yours very truly W. Olaf Stapledon[44]
Literary historians have been so eager to trace a lineage from Wells through Stapledon to later practitioners of science fiction that they have quoted the homage of the final sentence out of context. But it was Wells the utopian and the public educator, not the romancer, whose forgiveness Olaf asked for wholesale borrowing. The letter was forwarded to Wells on tour in the United States; from Boston he sent back a gruff, vulgar, typically Wellsian absolution (in which, like many other readers, he got Stapledon's title wrong): "It is all balls to suggest *First & Last Men* (which I found a very exciting book) owes anything to my writings. I wish it did." He told Stapledon he was endorsing the book in his new encyclopedia of economics, *The Work, Wealth and Happiness of Mankind*, and, always on the lookout for a disciple, invited him to visit his London flat or his French villa.[45] Their first meeting did not occur until five years later, but they began exchanging books, reviewing each other's work, and debating philosophy and politics by letter.
The history of the H. G. Wells Society is briefer but just as unedifying. With Wells's blessing, Society proclaimed its members open conspirators who would change minds and institutions. Vernon Porter, its young chairman, foresaw a cultural evolution with a fairy-tale ending: “The work of the Society would go on quietly, enthusiastically, continually, with ever-widening range, until one day mankind would wake up to find the World State no longer an inspiring vision but a living reality.”[15] Three speakers were advertised for the Society’s first public meeting on 15 May 1934 at Caxton Hall in London: the suffragist Sylvia Pankhurst, the dilettante journalist Gerald Heard, and Stapledon. The hall was crowded by a youthful, racially diverse audience. In a lengthy address Olaf, described by an observer (perhaps only by contrast to Pankhurst and Heard) as “a forceful he-man,” asked the Society to keep a distinction between education and propaganda, realizing that any utopian community must foster critical intelligence in its citizens, starting with its children.[16] At the same time, he said, an effective movement had to make emotional appeals because the opposition would not hesitate to use sentiment, propaganda, and theatrics to maintain the old order. Utopians needed fresh symbols, and “we should beat our opponents on their own ground and make use of even flags, banners, and slogans.” Finally, previewing a theme in his *Waking World*, he hedged on Wells’s social vision that neglected art and religion and overprized science; a reconstructed society must be wary of “scientists going the way of priests and becoming a hard and dogmatic caste.”
*Waking World* set out to correct an exclusively biological definition of human nature. Properly understood, Stapledon argued, the scientific revolution encouraged a "spiritualizing" process fundamentally different from the complacency of religious doctrines that assigned human beings a unique role in Creation. By dethroning humanity, scientific research can purify religion, restoring the meaning of "religare" (to tie back): "In giving man a sense of his indissoluble unity with the rest of the cosmos; and persuading him to be glad of it, the influence of science has been almost literally *religious*, binding, harmonizing."[25] By yoking religion and science, in however unorthodox a way, *Waking World* subverted a central tenet of Wellsianism. A modern, secular Utopia of the sort Wells had been boosting since the century began did not fulfill all human needs. The old gods of Greece and Judea, of the Vatican and Canterbury might be dead, but the religious sense had not atrophied.
rare pieces (1908–49) ↗ · ¶ 59 — quoted passage in context
One poet of the movement is Meredith, with his devotion to the Spirit of Earth. And he also links it both with earlier romanticism and with a later classicism. He admired nature less for her appearance, as Wordsworth did, than for her vitality. And man he admired less for his individuality, as Browning did, than for being Earth's self-conscious intelligence. But Meredith is more than an apostle of the faith in Earth and Man. His Comic Spirit gropes towards the mood of detachment which I shall presently describe. Meanwhile we may note in Bernard Shaw and H. G. Wells the same dualism of good and evil grounded in the dynamic nature of life, the same fervent championship, the same sense that man's real importance lies not in his individuality but in his instrumentality to the achievement of a goal which he himself has not yet clearly conceived. These writers have contributed to the faith which inspires militant "Labour" today, which distinguishes so sharply between the elect and the damned, which claims from the individual a puritanical loyalty to a certain social ideal or formula, which in fact is the modem, popular, and social-democratic form of Calvinism. Shaw, like Meredith, is saved by humour from rigid sectarianism, and gropes sometimes beyond the moral view; but Wells is more strictly confined within his faith. Bertrand Russell in his social writings, and in spite of his professed ethical scepticism, sometimes assumes the mood of righteous indignation; but though he renders allegiance to the ideal of cultural development he is also detached, and capable of dispassionate salutation.
Across the three held Wells novels the superman question gets three different answers, and the sequence is itself the finding. In A Modern Utopia (1905; comparison-tier for the title — no contact with this book is documented) the higher humanity is a discipline: the samurai, “your voluntary noblemen who have taken the world in hand,” in whom “Practically all political power vests… they are the only voters.” But the elite is open — any qualified adult “at any age after five-and-twenty” may enter — expressly not bred (“we know just enough of biology and the uncertainties of inheritance to know how silly that would be”), and designed to dissolve by universal entry: unlike every privileged caste before it, it “may indeed at last assimilate almost the whole population of the earth.” Its four “classes of mind” — “the Poietic, the Kinetic, the Dull, and the Base” — are drift-classes, not castes; its eugenics is negative and economic (“the breed of failure must not increase”), and positive breeding is mocked as “fixing a crane on the plain in order to raise the hill tops” — though the honest record includes the machinery’s chilling extension to “inferior” races, which the held text states without flinching (“as it exterminates all its own defective and inferior strains… by its marriage laws, and by the laws of the minimum wage”). Even the samurai’s God is instructive for this monograph: privately “a transcendental and mystical God,” publicly served by work — “by their discipline and denial, by their public work and effort, they worship God together.” Worship as world-service: the man-centred piety the 1934 lecture judged necessary and not enough. Against the lecture’s fourth world — a hierarchy of given capacity (sheet 10) — Wells’s 1905 hierarchy is one of will under discipline, aimed at its own abolition: the same spectrum, refused as government.
Wells, A Modern Utopia (1905) ↗ · ¶ 314 · ¶ 973 · ¶ 833 · ¶ 934 · ¶ 814 · ¶ 395 · ¶ 567 · ¶ 1013 · ¶ 941 — quoted passages in context
"Not I! I'm not one of your samurai, your voluntary noblemen who have taken the world in hand. I might be, of course, but I'm not."
After that I remember we fell talking of the discipline of the Rule, of the Courts that try breaches of it, and interpret doubtful cases--for, though a man may resign with due notice and be free after a certain time to rejoin again, one deliberate breach may exclude a man for ever--of the system of law that has grown up about such trials, and of the triennial council that revises and alters the Rule. From that we passed to the discussion of the general constitution of this World State. Practically all political power vests in the samurai. Not only are they the only administrators, lawyers, practising doctors, and public officials of almost all kinds, but they are the only voters. Yet, by a curious exception, the supreme legislative assembly must have one-tenth, and may have one-half of its members outside the order, because, it is alleged, there is a sort of wisdom that comes of sin and laxness, which is necessary to the perfect ruling of life. My double quoted me a verse from the Canon on this matter that my unfortunate verbal memory did not retain, but it was in the nature of a prayer to save the world from "unfermented men." It would seem that Aristotle's idea of a rotation of rulers, an idea that crops up again in Harrington's Oceana, that first Utopia of "the sovereign people" (a Utopia that, through Danton's readings in English, played a disastrous part in the French Revolution), gets a little respect in Utopia. The tendency is to give a practically permanent tenure to good men. Every ruler and official, it is true, is put on his trial every three years before a jury drawn by lot, according to the range of his activities, either from the samurai of his municipal area or from the general catalogue of the samurai, but the business of this jury is merely to decide whether to continue him in office or order a new election. In the majority of cases the verdict is continuation. Even if it is not so the official may still appear as a candidate before the second and separate jury which fills the vacant post....
"I follow the Common Rule, as many men do," said my double, answering my allusion to his uniform almost apologetically. "But my own work is, in its nature, poietic; there is much dissatisfaction with our isolation of criminals upon islands, and I am analysing the psychology of prison officials and criminals in general with a view to some better scheme. I am supposed to be ingenious with expedients in this direction. Typically, the samurai are engaged in administrative work. Practically the whole of the responsible rule of the world is in their hands; all our head teachers and disciplinary heads of colleges, our judges, barristers, employers of labour beyond a certain limit, practising medical men, legislators, must be samurai, and all the executive committees, and so forth, that play so large a part in our affairs are drawn by lot exclusively from them. The order is not hereditary--we know just enough of biology and the uncertainties of inheritance to know how silly that would be--and it does not require an early consecration or novitiate or ceremonies and initiations of that sort. The samurai are, in fact, volunteers. Any intelligent adult in a reasonably healthy and efficient state may, at any age after five-and-twenty, become one of the samurai, and take a hand in the universal control."
Women samurai who are married, my double told me, must bear children--if they are to remain married as well as in the order--before the second period for terminating a childless marriage is exhausted. I failed to ask for the precise figures from my double at the time, but I think it is beyond doubt that it is from samurai mothers of the Greater or Lesser Rule that a very large proportion of the future population of Utopia will be derived. There is one liberty accorded to women samurai which is refused to men, and that is to marry outside the Rule, and women married to men not under the Rule are also free to become samurai. Here, too, it will be manifest there is scope for novels and the drama of life. In practice, it seems that it is only men of great poietic distinction outside the Rule, or great commercial leaders, who have wives under it. The tendency of such unions is either to bring the husband under the Rule, or take the wife out of it. There can be no doubt that these marriage limitations tend to make the samurai something of an hereditary class. Their children, as a rule, become samurai. But it is not an exclusive caste; subject to the most reasonable qualifications, anyone who sees fit can enter it at any time, and so, unlike all other privileged castes the world has seen, it increases relatively to the total population, and may indeed at last assimilate almost the whole population of the earth.
This Utopian classification was a rough one, but it served its purpose to determine the broad lines of political organisation; it was so far unscientific that many individuals fall between or within two or even three of its classes. But that was met by giving the correlated organisation a compensatory looseness of play. Four main classes of mind were distinguished, called, respectively, the Poietic, the Kinetic, the Dull, and the Base. The former two are supposed to constitute the living tissue of the State; the latter are the fulcra and resistances, the bone and cover of its body. They are not hereditary classes, nor is there any attempt to develop any class by special breeding, simply because the intricate interplay of heredity is untraceable and incalculable. They are classes to which people drift of their own accord. Education is uniform until differentiation becomes unmistakable, and each man (and woman) must establish his position with regard to the lines of this abstract classification by his own quality, choice, and development....
The way of Nature in this process is to kill the weaker and the sillier, to crush them, to starve them, to overwhelm them, using the stronger and more cunning as her weapon. But man is the unnatural animal, the rebel child of Nature, and more and more does he turn himself against the harsh and fitful hand that reared him. He sees with a growing resentment the multitude of suffering ineffectual lives over which his species tramples in its ascent. In the Modern Utopia he will have set himself to change the ancient law. No longer will it be that failures must suffer and perish lest their breed increase, but the breed of failure must not increase, lest they suffer and perish, and the race with them.
But to the modern thinker individuality is the significant fact of life, and the idea of the State, which is necessarily concerned with the average and general, selecting individualities in order to pair them and improve the race, an absurdity. It is like fixing a crane on the plain in order to raise the hill tops. In the initiative of the individual above the average, lies the reality of the future, which the State, presenting the average, may subserve but cannot control. And the natural centre of the emotional life, the cardinal will, the supreme and significant expression of individuality, should lie in the selection of a partner for procreation.
Now there are various ways of exterminating a race, and most of them are cruel. You may end it with fire and sword after the old Hebrew fashion; you may enslave it and work it to death, as the Spaniards did the Caribs; you may set it boundaries and then poison it slowly with deleterious commodities, as the Americans do with most of their Indians; you may incite it to wear clothing to which it is not accustomed and to live under new and strange conditions that will expose it to infectious diseases to which you yourselves are immune, as the missionaries do the Polynesians; you may resort to honest simple murder, as we English did with the Tasmanians; or you can maintain such conditions as conduce to "race suicide," as the British administration does in Fiji. Suppose, then, for a moment, that there is an all-round inferior race; a Modern Utopia is under the hard logic of life, and it would have to exterminate such a race as quickly as it could. On the whole, the Fijian device seems the least cruel. But Utopia would do that without any clumsiness of race distinction, in exactly the same manner, and by the same machinery, as it exterminates all its own defective and inferior strains; that is to say, as we have already discussed in Chapter the Fifth, section 1, by its marriage laws, and by the laws of the minimum wage. That extinction need never be discriminatory. If any of the race did, after all, prove to be fit to survive, they would survive--they would be picked out with a sure and automatic justice from the over-ready condemnation of all their kind.
Clearly the God of the samurai is a transcendental and mystical God. So far as the samurai have a purpose in common in maintaining the State, and the order and progress of the world, so far, by their discipline and denial, by their public work and effort, they worship God together. But the fount of motives lies in the individual life, it lies in silent and deliberate reflections, and at this, the most striking of all the rules of the samurai aims. For seven consecutive days in the year, at least, each man or woman under the Rule must go right out of all the life of man into some wild and solitary place, must speak to no man or woman, and have no sort of intercourse with mankind. They must go bookless and weaponless, without pen or paper, or money. Provisions must be taken for the period of the journey, a rug or sleeping sack--for they must sleep under the open sky--but no means of making a fire. They may study maps beforehand to guide them, showing any difficulties and dangers in the journey, but they may not carry such helps. They must not go by beaten ways or wherever there are inhabited houses, but into the bare, quiet places of the globe--the regions set apart for them.
Men Like Gods (1923; comparison-tier for the title) abolishes the elite by fulfilling it: three thousand years on, “Our education is our government,” the “idle strains, the people of lethargic dispositions or weak imaginations, have mostly died out,” and the priest’s horror — “The human stud farm! Refusing to create souls!” — is the novel’s joke, not its worry. This is the flagship’s §2.3 “highbrow humanism” as achieved terminus — and the flagship’s §4 already holds the quarrel’s cleanest sentence (Utopia’s Nature “is not awful, she is horrible” against the lecture’s Other, which is exactly the awful). What this monograph adds is the novel’s treatment of worship itself. Utopia follows its wheel-tortured prophet but will not worship him — “We follow his teaching because it was wonderful and true,” while the historical worshippers “played a trick upon their own uneasy consciences by treating him as a magical god” — and Urthred’s diagnosis of theism is pragmatic, not Freudian: “It is all the same thing — God, or Evolution, or what you will — so long as you mean a Power beyond your own which excuses you from your duty.” And in the novel’s most extraordinary passage for this comparison, the one sorrowing Utopian is diagnosed — with the narrative’s full assent — as exhibiting a racial taint being bred out: “the dark sacrificial disposition that bows and responds to the shadow,” the spirit that represents “its God not as the Resurrection and the Life but as a woeful and defeated cadaver.” Wells’s utopia is breeding out the worshipper. Set beside sheet 30’s margin — where man’s true function, “To worship,” is struck and then restored with double underline — the two positions are exact contradictories in practice: the disposition Utopia eliminates as a taint is the one the lecture crowns as man’s office. Barnstaple’s own single act of worship completes the picture — “Mr. Barnstaple lifted up his hands like one who worships,” and the object is Utopia itself. Wells keeps the gesture and gives it to man’s own achievement; even his one Stapledonian vista — Sungold’s awakened cosmic Life “looking the mystery of God in the face as one meets the morning sun” — meets the mystery smiling, with human presence guaranteed. Star Maker’s cosmical mind plays the same scene and is met “not by welcoming and kindly love, but by a very different spirit.” Same theophany, opposite God.
Wells, Men Like Gods (1923) ↗ · ¶ 400 · ¶ 397 · ¶ 352 · ¶ 498 · ¶ 377 · ¶ 381 · ¶ 497 · ¶ 1452 · ¶ 584 · ¶ 1538 — quoted passages in context
Said Lion: "Our education is our government."
For centuries now Utopian science has been able to discriminate among births, and nearly every Utopian alive would have ranked as an energetic creative spirit in former days. There are few dull and no really defective people in Utopia; the idle strains, the people of lethargic dispositions or weak imaginations, have mostly died out; the melancholic type has taken its dismissal and gone; spiteful and malignant characters are disappearing. The vast majority of Utopians are active, sanguine, inventive, receptive and good-tempered.
"I feared as much," said Father Amerton, and leaning forward he covered his face with his hands, murmuring, "I felt this in the atmosphere! The human stud farm! Refusing to create souls! The _wickedness_ of it! Oh, my God!"
"These Earthlings do not yet dare to see what our Mother Nature is. At the back of their minds is still the desire to abandon themselves to her. They do not see that except for our eyes and wills, she is purposeless and blind. She is not awful, she is horrible. She takes no heed to our standards, nor to any standards of excellence. She made us by accident; all her children are bastards--undesired; she will cherish or expose them, pet or starve or torment without rhyme or reason. She does not heed, she does not care. She will lift us up to power and intelligence, or debase us to the mean feebleness of the rabbit or the slimy white filthiness of a thousand of her parasitic inventions. There must be good in her because she made all that is good in us--but also there is endless evil. Do not you Earthlings see the dirt of her, the cruelty, the insane indignity of much of her work?"
"We follow his teaching because it was wonderful and true," said Urthred.
There were those who worshipped him. There were those who quailed before the stern magnificence of his teaching and yet who had a tormenting sense that he was right in some profound way. So they played a trick upon their own uneasy consciences by treating him as a magical god instead of as a light to their souls. They interwove with his execution ancient traditions of sacrificial kings. Instead of receiving him frankly and clearly and making him a part of their understandings and wills they pretended to eat him mystically and make him a part of their bodies. They turned his wheel into a miraculous symbol, and they confused it with the equator and the sun and the ecliptic and indeed with anything else that was round. In cases of ill-luck, ill-health or bad weather it was believed to be very helpful for the believer to describe a circle in the air with the forefinger.
"It is all the same thing--God, or Evolution, or what you will--so long as you mean a Power beyond your own which excuses you from your duty. Utopia says, 'Do not leave things at all. Take hold.' But these Earthlings still lack the habit of looking at reality--undraped. This man with the white linen fetter round his neck is afraid even to look upon men and women as they are. He is disgustingly excited by the common human body. This man with the glass lens before his left eye struggles to believe that there is a wise old Mother Nature behind the appearances of things, keeping a Balance. It was fantastic to hear about his Balance of Nature. Cannot he with two eyes and a lens see better than that? This last man who spoke so impressively, thinks that this old Beldame Nature is a limitless source of will and energy if only we submit to her freaks and cruelties and imitate her most savage moods, if only we sufficiently thrust and kill and rob and ravish one another.... He too preaches the old fatalism and believes it is the teaching of science....
Since she was always close at hand, she filled for him perhaps more than her legitimate space in the Utopian spectacle. She lay across it like a shadow. He thought very frequently about her and about the pity and resentment against life and vigour that she embodied. In a world of fear, weakness, infection, darkness and confusion, pity, the act of charity, the alms and the refuge, the deed of stark devotion, might show indeed like sweet and gracious presences; but in this world of health and brave enterprises, pity betrayed itself a vicious desire. Crystal, Utopian youth, was as hard as his name. When he had slipped one day on some rocks and twisted and torn his ankle, he had limped but he had laughed. When Mr. Barnstaple was winded on a steep staircase Crystal was polite rather than sympathetic. So Lychnis had found no confederate in the dedication of her life to sorrow; even from Mr. Barnstaple she could win no sympathy. He perceived that indeed so far as temperament went he was a better Utopian than she was. To him as to Utopia it seemed rather an occasion for gladness than sorrow that her man and her children had met death fearlessly. They were dead; a brave stark death; the waters still glittered and the sun still shone. But her loss had revealed some underlying racial taint in her, something very ancient in the species, something that Utopia was still breeding out only very slowly, the dark sacrificial disposition that bows and responds to the shadow. It was strange and yet perhaps it was inevitable that Mr. Barnstaple should meet again in Utopia that spirit which earth knows so well, the spirit that turns from the Kingdom of Heaven to worship the thorns and the nails, which delights to represent its God not as the Resurrection and the Life but as a woeful and defeated cadaver.
Mr. Barnstaple lifted up his hands like one who worships to the friendly multitude of the stars above him.
"Some day here and everywhere, Life of which you and I are but anticipatory atoms and eddies, Life will awaken indeed, one and whole and marvellous, like a child awaking to conscious life. It will open its drowsy eyes and stretch itself and smile, looking the mystery of God in the face as one meets the morning sun. We shall be there then, all that matters of us, you and I....
Star Maker (1937) ↗ · ¶ 607 — quoted passage in context
For I had been confronted not by welcoming and kindly love, but by a very different spirit. And at once I knew that the Star Maker had made me not to be his bride, nor yet his treasured child, but for some other end.
Star Begotten (1937; documented reception — in the reverse direction) is Wells’s late superman fantasia, and it names its precedent inside the fiction: “You know that man Olaf Stapledon has already tried something of the sort in a book called Last and First Men.” Its Martians better mankind by cosmic-ray mutation — “Martian minds in seasoned terrestrial bodies”; “A new sort of mind is coming into the world, with a new, simpler, clearer, and more powerful way of thinking” — and the book walks to the very edge the 1934 lecture starts from: “you are foretelling now the end of common humanity. No less… This new world is something beyond all ordinary experience, something alien.” Keppel: “Yes.” There, at the edge, the two writers part. Keppel’s outburst indulges precisely what Shaw’s Devil warned of — “I hate common humanity. This oafish crowd which tramples the ground whence my cloud-capped pinnacles might rise” — and the novel’s last page domesticates the whole prospect into a nursery: the sleeping child, “Afraid of change? Afraid of the renascence to come?” Wells reaches man-is-transitional and finds hope and continuity, where the lecture found dread and a salute; his superman is “humanity’s big brother,” the interim risk merely “When the superman makes an aeroplane and the ape gets hold of it.” Even the christening is done in banter and declined: “‘Why not the star-men?’ said Keppel. ‘Homosideralis?’” — and Davis shrugs in the next paragraph, “why trouble about the name? Let us stick to Martians.” The instructive pairing is with Odd John, published two years earlier (comparison-tier; the held Wells names the 1930 epic, not the superman novel): both books imagine scattered superiors arising inside mankind, and their tenses diverge exactly where their theologies do. Wells keeps the whole plot conditional — his star-born “will necessarily become aware of one another,” someday — and ends in a nursery; Stapledon executes it: John resolves on “the founding of a little colony of supernormals,” and the book ends in the colony’s chosen destruction, “Suddenly there was blinding light and noise and pain, then nothing” — because the colony’s last business was the salute (§8.2), and the salute’s price is paid on the page. The three-book sequence, now fully quotable from held texts, is a superhumanism dissolving in slow motion: 1905, the elite as instrument; 1923, the elite outgrown; 1937, the improvement arriving from outside, unearned, greeted with longing. At the last two stations nothing is worshipped except man and his future; the first keeps the one exception this summary must preserve — the samurai’s privately prayed-to “transcendental and mystical God” — though even there the public discipline worships by work alone. That man-centred trajectory is why the 1934 lecture could endorse the whole program as necessary and still call it not enough.
Wells, Star Begotten (1937) ↗ · ¶ 349 · ¶ 194 · ¶ 563 · ¶ 711 · ¶ 714 · ¶ 824 · ¶ 366 · ¶ 567 · ¶ 549 · ¶ 550 · ¶ 568 — quoted passages in context
'Exactly. You know that man Olaf Stapledon has already tried something of the sort in a book called Last and First Men. Some day we shall certainly have to come to a general psychology independent of the human type, just as now these young men in the Society of Experimental Biology are getting away from the highly specialized peculiarities of human physiology towards a general physiological science. Now away there in Mars, as any astronomer will tell you, there are all the conditions necessary for a sort of life similar, if not identically similar, to life upon earth, the same elements--air, water, a temperature range not widely different. The probabilities are in favour of there having been a parallel--a roughly parallel evolution. Parallel but in some ways different. The gravitational energy, atmospheric pressure, and suchlike things are different and that would mean differences in lightness, vigour, and size. Martian plants and animals would probably run much bigger. Much bigger.'
'Suppose they say up there: "Let's start varying and modifying life on the earth. Let's change it. Let's get at the human character and the human brain and make it Martian-minded. Let's stop having children on this rusty little old planet of ours, and let's change men until they become in effect our children. Let's get spiritual children there." D'you see? Martian minds in seasoned terrestrial bodies.'
'Let's see how far we have got,' said Keppel. 'Let us try to disentangle as far as we can the pure guess-fantasy of an extra-terrestrial intervention, from the established realities that Davis has been elucidating. A new sort of mind is coming into the world, with a new, simpler, clearer, and more powerful way of thinking. That I think is manifest. It has already got into operation individually here and there and produced a sort of disorder of innovation in human affairs. But so far these new minds haven't got together for any sort of associated living. So far. They are hardly aware of themselves, much less of each other. They are scattered about anyhow. All that, I think, seems to be established?'
'Keppel,' said the doctor, 'let us be plain about this--you are foretelling now the end of common humanity. No less. This would not be human life. This new world is something beyond all ordinary experience, something alien.'
'That is where my hate goes,' he said. 'I hate common humanity. This oafish crowd which tramples the ground whence my cloud-capped pinnacles might rise. I am tired of humanity--beyond measure. Take it away. This gaping, stinking, bombing, shooting, throat-slitting, cringing brawl of gawky, under-nourished riff-raff. Clear the earth of them!'
The child lay on its side in its cot in a dreamless sleep. It scarcely seemed to breathe. The expression of that flushed little face with its closed eyes was one of veiled determination. One small clenched fist peeped over the coverlet. Afraid of change? Afraid of the renascence to come?
'Not till you've smoked one of those pennant-shaped Coronas you like,' said Keppel, 'and just a whiff of brandy. Because, confound it! you started this talk, you've interested me, and you've got to hear it out. If there is such a thing as a Martian, rest assured, Holdman Stedding, he's humanity's big brother.'
'But a damned unpleasant one,' said Dr. Holdman Stedding. 'When the superman makes an aeroplane and the ape gets hold of it.'
'Why not the star-men?' said Keppel. 'Homosideralis? How would one say Star-Begotten as a specific adjective?'
'One name seems to be as good as another,' said Davis, affecting indifference. 'Until we know better what they are, why trouble about the name? Let us stick to Martians.'
'Nevertheless--a temporary phase,' continued Keppel, holding to his argument with resolute tenacity. 'Because, as I say, to begin with, these Martians have been rare and scattered. But as they become more numerous--and I assume that there is no reason whatever why they should not become more and more numerous--they will necessarily become aware of one another, and get into touch with one another. Such minds, following the line of least resistence, will gravitate to scientific work. They will note and classify mental types. This must lead almost directly to self-discovery. They will observe how they resemble each other and how they differ from the wimble-wamble of the common world. They will begin to know themselves for what they are.'
Odd John (1935) ↗ · ¶ 153 · ¶ 251 — quoted passages in context
CHAPTER XIV. ENGINEERING PROBLEMS NOT LONG AFTER John told me of his efforts to make contact with other supernormals he took me into his confidence about his plans for the future. We were in the subterranean workshop. He was absorbed in a new invention, a sort of generator-accumulator, he said. His bench was covered with test-tubes, jars, bits of metal, bottles, insulated wires, voltmeters, lumps of stone. He was so intent on his work that I said, “I believe you’re regressing to childhood. This sort of thing has got hold of you again and made you forget all about — Scotland.” “No, you’re wrong,” he said. “This gadget is an important part of my plan. When I have finished this test I’ll tell you.” Silently he proceeded with the experiment. Presently, with a little shout of triumph, he said, “Got it, this time!” Over a cup of coffee we discussed his plans. He was determined to search the whole world in the hope of discovering a few others of his kind, and of suitable age for joining with him in the founding of a little colony of supernormals in some remote part of the earth. In order to do this without loss of time, he said, he must have an ocean-going yacht and a small aeroplane, or flying machine of some kind, which could be stowed on the yacht. When I protested that he knew nothing about flying and less about designing planes, he replied. “Oh yes, I do. I learned to fly yesterday.” It seems he had managed to persuade a certain brilliant young airman to give him not only a joy-ride but a long spell in control of the machine. “Once you get the feel of it,” he said, “it’s easy enough. I landed twice, and took off twice, and did a few stunts. But of course there’s a good deal more to
break the news gently, because we know the main part of it. John gave me visions of it. I saw those tipsy brutes routed by his power. And in a few days afterwards I saw many happy things on the island. I saw John and Lo, walking together on the shore, like lovers at last. One day I saw all the young people sitting in a panelled room, evidently their meeting-room. I heard John say that it was time to die. They all rose and went away, in couples and little groups; and presently they gathered round the door of a stone building that must have been their power-station. Ng-Gunko went through the door, carrying Sambo. Suddenly there was blinding light and noise and pain, then nothing.” OceanofPDF.com
Wells, A Modern Utopia (1905) ↗ · ¶ 941 — quoted passage in context
Clearly the God of the samurai is a transcendental and mystical God. So far as the samurai have a purpose in common in maintaining the State, and the order and progress of the world, so far, by their discipline and denial, by their public work and effort, they worship God together. But the fount of motives lies in the individual life, it lies in silent and deliberate reflections, and at this, the most striking of all the rules of the samurai aims. For seven consecutive days in the year, at least, each man or woman under the Rule must go right out of all the life of man into some wild and solitary place, must speak to no man or woman, and have no sort of intercourse with mankind. They must go bookless and weaponless, without pen or paper, or money. Provisions must be taken for the period of the journey, a rug or sleeping sack--for they must sleep under the open sky--but no means of making a fire. They may study maps beforehand to guide them, showing any difficulties and dangers in the journey, but they may not carry such helps. They must not go by beaten ways or wherever there are inhabited houses, but into the bare, quiet places of the globe--the regions set apart for them.
6.2 Beresford’s Hampdenshire Wonder (1911): the superman without worship
The acknowledgment is the project’s cleanest influence chain — biography to endnote to primary text without leaving the held corpus. Crossley: “Stapledon indicated the express influence of the last of these on his book,” the last of these being Beresford’s novel of Victor Stott; and Odd John’s preface performs the acknowledgment itself, citing “Mr. J. D. Beresford’s account of the unhappy Victor Stott” as the one-sided case the new record will correct (“a mind at once more strikingly ‘superhuman’ and more broadly human”), with the narrative twice more taking the Wonder as its assumed standard — John reading dictionaries “in the manner of Victor Stott.” Documented reception, then — and what makes it belong in this monograph is what the acknowledged precursor’s superman lacks.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 917 — quoted passage in context
*Odd John* has a pivotal place in the history of fictions that imagine the difficult emergence, by natural process or artificial intervention, of a higher form of humanity. Of the notable "superman" novels that preceded it—Mary Shelley's *Frankenstein*, Wells's *Food of the Gods*, and J. D. Beresford's *Hampdenshire Wonder*—Stapledon indicated the express influence of the last of these on his book.[61] Several later contributions to the type, all by authors who read Stapledon carefully, have the mark of *Odd John* on them. John's *homo superior* in search of a community becomes Wells's *homo sideralis* in *Star-Begotten* (1937) and Theodore Sturgeon's *homo gestalt* in *More Than Human* (1953). Arthur Clarke's metamorphosed children in *Childhood's End* (also 1953) are nearly as weird as John's companions. Our last glimpse of Ben Lovatt in Doris Lessing's *Fifth Child* (1988), of all the analogues the one most nearly like *Odd John*, is an image of him on the television screen "standing rather apart from the crowd, staring at the camera with his goblin eyes, or searching the faces in the crowd for another of his own kind."[62]
Odd John (1935) ↗ · ¶ 7 · ¶ 24 — quoted passages in context
John’s laugh was strangely disturbing. It was a low, rapid, crisp chuckle. It reminded me of that whispered crackling prelude which sometimes precedes a really great crash of thunder. But no thunder followed it, only a moment’s silence; and for his hearers an odd tingling of the scalp. I believe that this inhuman, this ruthless but never malicious laugh of John’s contained the key to all that baffles me in his character. Again and again I asked myself why he laughed just then, what precisely was he laughing at, what did his laughter really mean, was that strange noise really laughter at all, or some emotional reaction incomprehensible to my kind? Why, for instance, did the infant John laugh through his tears when he had upset a kettle and was badly scalded? I was not present at his death, but I feel sure that, when his end came, his last breath spent itself in zestful laughter. Why? In failing to answer these questions, I fail to understand the essential John. His laughter, I am convinced, sprang from some aspect of his experience entirely beyond my vision. I am therefore, of course, as John affirmed, a very incompetent biographer. But if I keep silence, the facts of his unique career will be lost for ever. In spite of my incompetence, I must record all that I can, in the hope that, if these pages fall into the hands of some being of John’s own stature, he may imaginatively see through them to the strange but glorious spirit of John himself. That others of his kind, or approximately of his kind, are now alive, and that yet others will appear, is at least probable. But as John himself discovered, the great majority of these very rare supernormals, whom John sometimes called “wide-awakes,” are either so delicate physically or so unbalanced mentally that they leave no considerable mark on the world. How pathetically one-sided the supernormal development may be is revealed in Mr. J. D. Beresford’s account of the unhappy Victor Stott. I hope
Even Stephen was praiseful. He told his mother, “That kid’s all right really. The hiding did him good. He has apologized about the mower, and hoped he hadn’t jiggered it up.” But fate had a surprise in store for Stephen. In spite of his father’s discouragement, John had been spending odd moments among the medical and physiological books. The anatomical drawings interested him greatly, and to understand them properly, he had to read. His vocabulary was of course very inadequate, so he proceeded in the manner of Victor Stott, and read through from cover to cover, first a large English dictionary, then a dictionary of physiological terms. Very soon he became so fluent that he had only to run his eye rapidly down the middle of a printed page to be able to understand it and retain it indefinitely. But John was not content with theory. One day, to Pax’s horror, he was found cutting up a dead rat on the dining-room floor, having thoughtfully spread a newspaper to protect the carpet. Henceforth his anatomical studies, both practical and theoretical, were supervised by Doc. For a few months John was enthralled. He showed great skill in dissection and microscopy. He catechized his father at every opportunity, and often exposed the confusion of his answers; till at last Pax, remembering the mathematicians, insisted that the tired doctor must have respite. Henceforth John studied unaided. Then suddenly he dropped biology as he had dropped mathematics. Pax asked, “Have you finished with ‘life’ as you finished with ‘number?’ ” “No,” replied John, “but life doesn’t hang together like number. It won’t make a pattern. There’s something wrong with all those books. Of course, I often see they’re stupid, but there must be something deeper wrong too, which I can’t see.”
Beresford’s Wonder is planned as a body and delivered as a mind: the crippled cricketer wants a son bred without habits — “I must ‘ave a kid of my own and learn ‘im from his cradle” — and the eugenic will produces the wrong transcendence. The child reads the Encyclopædia Britannica in three weeks and hands down the verdict — “So elementary … inchoate … a disjunctive … patchwork” — and his one metaphysical exchange forecloses the question Odd John exists to reopen: “Is there none of my kind?… is this all?” — “There is none of your kind,” replied Challis. Around him the novel stages worship only to punish it: his mother “thinks ‘e’s Gawd A’mighty or suthing,” and when she loses “her belief in the supernal wisdom and power of her god, her world must have fallen about her” — she dies insane; the narrator’s own reverence is fear rationalized (“I feared him as I had once feared an imaginary God, but I did not hate him”); and the one professed religion in the book, the rector’s, ends (probably) in the child’s murder. The Wonder himself worships nothing: asked about a future life, he answers from evidential poverty — “There are no data.” — and what survives of his doctrine ends in entropy: “Perfect knowledge implies the peace of death, implies the state of being one.” Challis’s diagnosis is the book’s own admission of the one-sidedness Stapledon’s preface seized on: “Intellectual insight and absolute spiritual blindness… not one spark of the imagination of a poet.”
Beresford, Hampdenshire Wonder (1911) ↗ · ¶ 253 · ¶ 989 · ¶ 1003 · ¶ 1004 · ¶ 295 · ¶ 1696 · ¶ 1468 · ¶ 1381 · ¶ 1719 · ¶ 1126 — quoted passages in context
"What else 'ud I tie myself up for?" asked Stott. "I must 'ave a kid of my own and learn 'im from his cradle. It's come to that."
"So elementary ... inchoate ... a disjunctive ... patchwork" replied the Wonder. His abstracted eyes were blind to the objective world of our reality; he seemed to be profoundly analysing the very elements of thought.
"Is there none of my kind?" he said. "Is this," and he laid a hand on the pile of books before him, "is this all?"
"There is none of your kind," replied Challis; and the little figure born into a world that could not understand him, that was not ready to receive him, walked to the window and climbed out into the darkness.
"I dunno," replied Stott, "somethin' about learnin' and talkin'. I didn't get the rights of it, but the missus near fainted--she thinks 'e's Gawd A'mighty or suthing."
Ellen Mary never recovered her sanity. She died a few weeks ago in the County Asylum. I hear that her husband attended the funeral. When she lost her belief in the supernal wisdom and power of her god, her world must have fallen about her. The thing she had imagined to be solid, real, everlasting, had proved to be friable and destructible like all other human building.
Towards the end of the summer, the occasions upon which I was able to stimulate myself into a condition of bearable complacency were very rare. I often thought of Challis's advice to leave the Wonder alone. I should have gone away if I had been free, but Victor Stott had a use for me, and I was powerless to disobey him. I feared him, but he controlled me at his will. I feared him as I had once feared an imaginary God, but I did not hate him.
"That I can't explain," said the Wonder. "There are no data."
"I glimpsed a finality," he said, "and that appalled me. Don't you see that ignorance is the means of our intellectual pleasure? It is the solving of the problem that brings enjoyment--the solved problem has no further interest. So when all is known, the stimulus for action ceases; when all is known there is quiescence, nothingness. Perfect knowledge implies the peace of death, implies the state of being one--our pleasures are derived from action, from differences, from heterogeneity.
"Sublimated material. Intellectual insight and absolute spiritual blindness," replied Challis, getting to his feet. "The child has gone too far in one direction--in another he has made not one step. His mind is a magnificent, terrible machine. He has the imagination of a mathematician and a logician developed beyond all conception, he has not one spark of the imagination of a poet. And so he cannot deal with men; he can't understand their weaknesses and limitations; they are geese and hens to him, creatures to be scared out of his vicinity. However, I will see what I can do. Could you arrange for the members of the Authority to come to my place?"
What Odd John adds to its acknowledged model is, precisely, the 1934 lecture’s religion. Others of his kind (the answer to Challis’s sentence); the colony; and above all the end: the supernormals die “to fulfil as much as possible of our accepted spiritual task of worship,” to “salute That in the universe which was of supreme excellence.” Seen from the Wonder, Odd John is not just the lecture fictionalized (the flagship’s §3.9 reads it so) but Beresford’s book corrected by the lecture: the genre’s superman given the one faculty the genre had never issued him — worship. The correction cuts both ways, and the flagship §3.11 ledger holds the other edge: John’s politics drew Haldane’s fascism charge within months (§5.2), and the superman’s exemptions (“Had we been members of your species… what we did would have been a crime”) are exactly the contempt Shaw’s Devil predicted. The lecture’s discipline — worship of the more-than-human fenced by unswerving service of the human — is stricter than its own novel.
Odd John (1935) ↗ · ¶ 239 · ¶ 231 · ¶ 194 — quoted passages in context
too impoverished, spiritually, for our real work. But as things are, surely the wise course is to forego the weapon, and make up our minds to fulfil as much as possible of our accepted spiritual task of worship before we are destroyed.” I could tell by merely watching the faces of the islanders that they were now in the throes of a conflict of wills such as they had never before experienced. The issue was not merely one of life and death; it was one of fundamental principle. When Shên Kuo had done, there was a clamour of protest and argument, much of which was actually vocal; for the islanders were deeply moved. It was soon agreed that the decision should be postponed for a day. Meanwhile there must be a solemn meeting in the meeting-room, and all hearts must be deeply searched in a most earnest effort to reach mental accord and the right decision. The meeting was silent. It lasted for many hours. When it was over I learned that all, including Ng- Gunko and John himself, had accepted with conviction and with gladness the views of Shên Kuo. The weeks passed. Telepathic observation informed us that, when the second cruiser had left us, considerable amnesia and other mental derangements had occurred among those of the crew who had landed on the island. The Commander’s report was incoherent and incredible. Like the first Commander, he was disgraced. The Foreign Offices of the world, through their secret services, ferreted out as much as possible of this latest incident. They did not form anything like an accurate idea of events, but they procured shreds of truth embroidered with fantastic exaggeration. There was a general feeling that something more was at stake than a diplomatic coup, and the discomfiture of the British Government. Something weird, something quite beyond reckoning was going on on that remote island. Three ships had been sent away with their crews in mental
abandoned. The islanders told me that they had certain supreme tasks on hand which must, if possible, be finished before the end. The true purpose of the awakened spirit, they reminded me, is twofold, namely to help in the practical talk of world-building, and to employ itself to the best of its capacity in intelligent worship. Under the first head they had at least created something glorious though ephemeral, a microcosm, a world in little. But the more ambitious part of their practical purpose, the founding of a new species, they were destined never to fulfil. Therefore they were concentrating all their strength upon the second aim. They must apprehend existence as precisely and zestfully as they could, and salute That in the universe which was of supreme excellence. This purpose, with the aid of Langatse, they might yet advance to a definite plane of achievement which at present still lay beyond them, though their most mature minds had already glimpsed it. With their unique practical experience and their consciousness of approaching doom they might, they said, within a few months offer to the universal Spirit such a bright and peculiar jewel of worship as even the great Langatse himself, alone and thwarted, could not create. This most exalting and most exacting of all tasks made it necessary for them to give up all but the necessary daily toil in the fields and in the canoes. Not that very much of their time could be devoted to their spiritual exercises, for there was danger of overstraining their powers. It was necessary therefore to secure plentiful relaxation. Much of the life of the colony during this period seemed to consist of recreation. There was much bathing in the shark-free harbour, much love-making, much dancing and music and poetry, and much aesthetic juggling with colour and form. It was difficult for me to enter into the aesthetic appreciation of the islanders, but from their reactions to their own art in this period I judged that the
indeed have abolished from the minds of the Frome’s survivors all memory of the rescue. “But you see,” he said, “we could not do it. We had deliberately risked publicity, as we had risked destruction by the storm, hoping to avoid it. We tried to set up a process of ‘oblivifaction’ in our guests, but we failed. As for the wickedness of the act, Fido, it naturally revolts you, but you are leaving something out of account. Had we been members of your species, concerned only with the dreamlike purposes of the normal mind, what we did would have been a crime. For to-day the chief lesson which your species has to learn is that it is far better to die, far better to sacrifice even the loftiest of all ‘sapient’ purposes, than to kill beings of one’s own mental order. But just as you kill wolves and tigers so that the far brighter spirits of men may flourish, so we killed those unfortunate creatures that we had rescued. Innocent as they were, they were dangerous. Unwittingly they threatened the noblest practical venture that has yet occurred on this planet. Think! If you, and Bertha, had found yourselves in a world of great apes, clever in their own way, lovable too, but blind, brutish, and violent, would you have refused to kill? Would you have sacrificed the founding of a human world? To refuse would be cowardly, not physically, but spiritually. Well, if we could wipe out your whole species, frankly, we would. For if your species discovers us, and realizes at all what we are, it will certainly destroy us. And we know, you must remember, that Homo sapiens has little more to contribute to the music of this planet, nothing in fact but vain repetition. It is time for finer instruments to take up the theme.” When he had done, John looked at me almost pleadingly. He seemed to long for my approval, the approval of a half-human thing, his faithful hound. Did he, after all, feel guilty? I think not. I think this strong desire to persuade me sprang simply from affection. For my part, such is my faith in
6.3 Nietzsche: the read-and-rejected Übermensch
The era’s most famous superman doctrine enters this monograph last among the literary streams because the documented contact is smallest, and the comparison must be sized to it. The evidence is one letter, from an ambulance-unit billet, mid-January 1918:
“I have been reading Nietzsche’s ‘Also Sprach Zarathustra,’ but in translation. It is annoyingly pompous, and its ideal is ludicrously egotistical; but it has brilliant truths in it here and there, and of course it is interesting to read what the Germans so often profess as their ideal, and to see how far they have really drifted from pure Nietzsche. It is a book to make one think, even if the thinking is often hostile to the author’s idea.”
Letters (1913–19) ↗ · ¶ 316 — quoted passage in context
[…] promise to part of the invisible portions, in cold water outside. But in hard frost even that gets omitted, & people wait for a change of wind and wipe their faces every morning on a damp towel. My personal sorrow at present is connected with boots. I have two pairs, one of trench boots & one ordinary. The ordinary ones are old and dilapidated; the “trenchers” suddenly began to fall to pieces, and as the divisional bootmaker says he is too busy to mend them I had to send them to a town, where they will be probably a month. Meanwhile I have one “holy” pair that are always soaking wet. Consequently it is a very long time since one had dry feet in the daytime. All these tragedies are nothing compared with the real tragedies of the world today, but all the same they are amazing. . . . Another Day. ... I have been reading Nietzsche’s “Also Sprach Zarathustra,” but in translation. It is annoyingly pompous, and its ideal is ludicrously egotistical; but it has brilliant truths in it here and there, and of course it is interesting to read what the Germans so often profess as their ideal, and to see how far they have really drifted from pure Nietzsche. It is a book to make one think, even if the thinking is often hostile to the author’s idea. And it is wonderful to see how all these great and so different books & men, like Nietzsche, Bergson, Mazzini, Meredith, Morris, Comte, Shelley, Swinburne, Browning, and even Carlyle—all seem to contribute some definite idea that is gradually proving essential to the new faith. It is like a game of patience—fitting in the cards in their right places. And in each case there seems to be so much that will not stand the test, that is not the real true truth, and just one brilliant idea that has been waited for by a puzzled world. . . . As to Conscription, […]
the held text is uncorrected OCR of the print edition, which often confuses c and e (“ehureh” for “church”); the excerpt is shown exactly as held.
That is the whole documented floor, and its ceiling: the translator unnamed (the held Common text is the era’s standard; the identification is ours), the book perhaps unfinished (“have been reading”), the motive partly wartime diagnostics. The letter’s next sentence files Nietzsche among the “great and so different books & men” each contributing “some definite idea that is gradually proving essential to the new faith” — a sifting verdict, not a scoffer’s (the biography’s summary hardens “the thinking is often hostile to the author’s idea” into personal hostility; the letter is milder, and the correction matters because commentators, as Crossley notes, “assume Nietzsche as a presiding philosophical influence” on the superman novel — the letter is the documented counter-evidence, at its documented strength). After 1918 the record is nearly silent: one list-mention in Waking World (1934), nothing in the two-volume 1939 syllabus, nothing in the lecture sheets.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 918 — quoted passage in context
Recent commentaries on *Odd John* assume Nietzsche as a presiding philosophical influence. Actually, when Olaf read *Also Sprach Zarathustra* he thought it "pompous" and "ludicrously egotistical," declaring himself "hostile" to its central ideas.[63] Nevertheless, what he objected to in *Zarathustra* others might find all too evident in the career of John. One friendly reader of the novel dissented sharply from the tradition of utopian "supermen" the author had joined. Jack Haldane told Olaf the idea of an evolutionary sport was "perfectly possible" scientifically, but he deplored a regressive ideology that premised Utopia on a charismatic leader with telepathic powers:
The doctrine itself, in Common’s held translation, gives the comparison its clean joints. Zarathustra’s Superman is future, earthly, and ours to make: “I TEACH YOU THE SUPERMAN. Man is something that is to be surpassed”; “The Superman is the meaning of the earth”; man “a rope stretched between the animal and the Superman”; our best office “into fathers and forefathers of the Superman could ye transform yourselves”; and the gods are dead precisely so that he may live — “DEAD ARE ALL THE GODS: NOW DO WE DESIRE THE SUPERMAN TO LIVE.” The succession is explicit: “Once did people say God, when they looked out upon distant seas; now, however, have I taught you to say, Superman.” And worship is the one relapse the book cannot forgive — Part IV’s higher men fall to adoring an ass, and Zarathustra’s horror is total: “They have all of them become PIOUS again, they PRAY, they are mad!”
Nietzsche, Zarathustra (Common trans.) ↗ · ¶ 177 · ¶ 183 · ¶ 205 · ¶ 1051 · ¶ 1004 · ¶ 1048 · ¶ 3660 — quoted passages in context
I TEACH YOU THE SUPERMAN. Man is something that is to be surpassed. What have ye done to surpass man?
The Superman is the meaning of the earth. Let your will say: The Superman SHALL BE the meaning of the earth!
Man is a rope stretched between the animal and the Superman—a rope over an abyss.
Not perhaps ye yourselves, my brethren! But into fathers and forefathers of the Superman could ye transform yourselves: and let that be your best creating!—
“DEAD ARE ALL THE GODS: NOW DO WE DESIRE THE SUPERMAN TO LIVE.”—Let this be our final will at the great noontide!—
Once did people say God, when they looked out upon distant seas; now, however, have I taught you to say, Superman.
“They have all of them become PIOUS again, they PRAY, they are mad!”—said he, and was astonished beyond measure. And forsooth! all these higher men, the two kings, the pope out of service, the evil magician, the voluntary beggar, the wanderer and shadow, the old soothsayer, the spiritually conscientious one, and the ugliest man—they all lay on their knees like children and credulous old women, and worshipped the ass. And just then began the ugliest man to gurgle and snort, as if something unutterable in him tried to find expression; when, however, he had actually found words, behold! it was a pious, strange litany in praise of the adored and censed ass. And the litany sounded thus:
The genuine kinships are real and must be granted: both dethrone man-as-measure (“What is the greatest thing ye can experience? It is the hour of great contempt” sits strikingly close to the sheets’ complaint that humanism “turns mankind into a mutual improvement and admiration society”); both damn consolation-religion (the preachers of “superearthly hopes” are Zarathustra’s poisoners, as the craving for salvation is sheet 28’s). But the symmetry at the centre is a perfect chiasmus. Zarathustra keeps the adoring energy and re-aims it at man’s future — “I love the great despisers, because they are the great adorers, and arrows of longing for the other shore” — while forbidding worship as madness. Stapledon keeps the worship and re-aims it away from man and everything man will ever become — saluting “though it destroy me” — while forbidding the contempt. Each occupies exactly the position the other forbids. (One period voice thought the kinship ran deeper: Gerald Heard — a documented Stapledon interlocutor — credited to Nietzsche the very anthropology of the sheets’ margin, “He is, as Nietzsche recognized, a transitional animal.” The sheets assert man’s transitionality without pedigree; whether any pedigree exists, the record cannot say.) One twist closes the section: in all thirty-four sheets of the 1934 manuscript the word “supermen” occurs only on sheet 10 — three times, for two of the hypothetical worlds. Twice it belongs to the third world: “a brotherhood of equal supermen,” dismissed “∵ capacities vary in rank” (the verdict line returns to it: “θ brotherhood of supermen — impossible”). Once it belongs to the fourth, the world the lecture endorses — “a few supermen attaining humanity” at the top of the fulfilled hierarchy. The dismissal’s rank-order ground is one Zarathustra would have cheerfully endorsed, and the endorsed world’s supermen sharpen the same point: even they are nobody’s object of worship. The quarrel was never about whether men differ in stature. It was about whether anything is owed a salute.
Nietzsche, Zarathustra (Common trans.) ↗ · ¶ 192 · ¶ 184 · ¶ 209 — quoted passages in context
What is the greatest thing ye can experience? It is the hour of great contempt. The hour in which even your happiness becometh loathsome unto you, and so also your reason and virtue.
I conjure you, my brethren, REMAIN TRUE TO THE EARTH, and believe not those who speak unto you of superearthly hopes! Poisoners are they, whether they know it or not.
I love the great despisers, because they are the great adorers, and arrows of longing for the other shore.
Heard, The Source of Civilization (1935) ↗ · ¶ 857 — quoted passage in context
Meanwhile a desperate effort is made to stabilize the immense conquests Rome has united into a single state Save on the Persian front no force of an equality faces the legions Wealth begins to accumulate when through so vast a territory there is only one unstinted consumer to be kept People reflect how happy it would be if such a state were to become perpetual Here surely is the perfect balance, the individual desires, a condition wherein he can pursue his own private ends and be always protected, where he can remain for ever as he is, peace being a continual preservation of the *status quo* of society and of himself as an unresolved individual in that *status quo* Such a dream is illusory for man Some species can stabilize. As we have mentioned, the cockroach and the shark have remained unmodified for some 200 million years Higher forms of life, however, seem inherently more unstable — they must go up or down Man must develop or degenerate He is, as Nietzsche recognized, a transitional animal Stoicism's judgment has already been quoted 'He that is not getting better is getting worse'.
7. The cosmic religious: Otto, Alexander, Whitehead, Teilhard
The streams so far all make the superhuman — breed it, will it, engineer it, write it. The fourth stream finds it already there, and worships. This is where the 1934 position has its real family, and where the family resemblances must be drawn most carefully, because each of the four relationships sits on a different tier: Otto documented-read (in the lecture’s own diary-year); Alexander engaged-and-refused (credited in Stapledon’s own footnote, his consolations declined); Whitehead quoted-and-declined (his most famous sentence copied out in Stapledon’s 1939 exposition and rejected in the next breath); Teilhard independent-convergent (no contact documented in either direction, and the chronology leaves little room for one — the strongest foil precisely because no influence claim is available).
7.1 Otto: the vocabulary of the Other (documented reading)
The debt is treated in full at the flagship’s §2.6(b) — the sheets carry Otto’s dual structure whole, the tremendum and the fascinans together, the objectivity claim, the evoke-don’t-define method — and the reading is now documented biographical fact in the lecture’s own season: “In 1934, Olaf read one of the landmarks of modern theology, Rudolf Otto’s Idea of the Holy, and found a kindred spirit,” the endnote placing the book “at the back of OS’s 1933–34 diary.” What this monograph takes from Otto is one structural point the other streams throw into relief. Otto’s numinous object is given, not made — the feeling has “immediate and primary reference to an object outside the self” — and it is dreadful and fascinating at once, “the daunting and the fascinating” in “a strange harmony of contrasts,” teachable only by evocation (“it can only be evoked, awakened in the mind”). Every maker-superhumanism in this monograph fails at least one of those tests: Galton’s higher life and Shaw’s Superman are products; Haldane’s deity is a bigger us; Bernal outgrows the shudder; Wells’s Utopia diagnoses it as a taint; the ethical church kept worship but expelled the mystery (§3.1). Otto supplies the one grammar in which the 1934 position is even sayable — a present, objective, dreadful-and-beautiful More — and the lecture’s departure from Otto (no schematization into the Christian God; “to call it personal is to belittle it”) is its departure from doctrine as such. (One channel caveat travels with the reading, weighed in full at the flagship: Julian Huxley’s 1927 book had quoted Otto’s mysterium-tremendum pages at length — “I have quoted from Otto at some length,” it says plainly — so a 1934 platform could have had the dual structure second-hand; the diary evidence makes first-hand the economical reading, and the month within the diary-year cannot be fixed.)
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 976 · ¶ 2251 — quoted passages in context
To the degree that *Star Maker* belongs to the literature of spiritual quest, Myers was an ideal reader (although, happily, Stapledon took little of his advice about altering the theological vision of the final chapters). Few twentieth-century works of fiction take theological inquiry as far as *Star Maker* does, and the work it has most often been compared to is the *Divine Comedy*. What Dante built, Stapledon dismantled. Where Dante invested a stable cosmos with a supremely authoritative, managerially efficient, and just but loving God, Stapledon found radical instability in multiple cosmoses, launched and discarded by a force inaccessible to human understanding. As for the Star Maker's relationship to his creation, love has nothing to do with it. But as original a work of theological romancing as *Star Maker* is, it is not merely idiosyncratic. In 1934, Olaf read one of the landmarks of modern theology, Rudolf Otto's *Idea of the Holy*, and found a kindred spirit. He was soon recommending Otto's concept of the "numinous" or radically "other" nature of divinity and telling people that awe was the central religious emotion, "a corrective to the much commoner idea that the essence of religion is the conviction of the deity's friendliness."[39]
39. *PL*, vol. 2, p. 460. *The Idea of the Holy* is on a list of books read at the back of OS's 1933–34 diary (SA). On the impact of Dante on *Star Maker*, see Robert Scholes, *Structural Fabulation: An Essay on Fiction of the Future* (Notre Dame, Ind: Notre Dame Univ. Press, 1975), 64–66, and chap. 4, "Divine Tragedy," of Patrick A. McCarthy's *Olaf Stapledon* (Boston: Twayne, 1982).
Otto, The Idea of the Holy (1923) ↗ · ¶ 82 · ¶ 153 · ¶ 73 — quoted passages in context
We have now to note a second defect in the formulation of Schleiermacher's principle. The religious category discovered by him, by whose means he professes to determine the real content of the religious emotion, is merely a category of self-valuation, in the sense of self-depreciation. According to him the religious emotion would be directly and primarily a sort of *self-consciousness*, a feeling concerning one's self in a special, determined relation, viz. one's dependence. Thus, according to Schleiermacher, I can only come upon the very fact of God as the result of an inference, that is, by reasoning to a cause beyond myself to account for my 'feeling of dependence'. But this is entirely opposed to the psychological facts of the case. Rather, the 'creature-feeling' is itself a first subjective concomitant and effect of another feeling-element, which casts it like a shadow, but which in itself indubitably has immediate and primary reference to an object outside the self.1
These two qualities, the daunting and the fascinating, now combine in a strange harmony of contrasts, and the resultant dual character of the numinous consciousness, to which the entire religious development bears witness, at any rate from the level of the 'daemonic dread' onwards, is at once the strangest and most noteworthy phenomenon in the whole history of religion. The daemonic-divine object may appear to the mind an object of horror and dread, but at the same time it is no less something that allures with a potent charm, and the creature, who trembles before it, utterly cowed and cast down, has always at the same time the impulse to turn to it, nay even to make it somehow his own. The 'mystery' is for him not merely something to be wondered at but something that entrances him; and beside that in it which bewilders and confounds, he feels a something that captivates and transports him with a strange ravishment, rising often enough to the pitch of dizzy intoxication; it is the Dionysiac element in the numen.
Accordingly, it is worth while, as we have said, to find a word to stand for this element in isolation, this 'extra' in the meaning of 'holy' above and beyond the meaning of goodness. By means of a special term we shall the better be able, first, to keep the meaning clearly apart and distinct, and second, to apprehend and classify connectedly whatever subordinate forms or stages of development it may show. For this purpose I adopt a word coined from the Latin *numen*. *Omen* has given us *ominous*, and there is no reason why from *numen* we should not similarly form a word 'numinous'. I shall speak then of a unique 'numinous' category of value and of a definitely 'numinous' state of mind, which is always found wherever the category is applied. This mental state is perfectly *sui generis* and irreducible to any other; and therefore, like every absolutely primary and elementary datum, while it admits of being discussed, it cannot be strictly defined. There is only one way to help another to an understanding of it. He must be guided and led on by consideration and discussion of the matter through the ways of his own mind, until he reach the point at which 'the numinous' in him perforce begins to stir, to start into life and into consciousness. We can co-operate in this process by bringing before his notice all that can be found in other regions of the mind, already known and familiar, to resemble, or again to afford some special contrast to, the particular experience we wish to elucidate. Then we must add: 'This *X* of ours is not precisely *this* experience, but akin to this one and the opposite of that other. Cannot you now realize for yourself what it is?' In other words our *X* cannot, strictly speaking, be taught, it can only be evoked, awakened in the mind; as everything that comes 'of the spirit' must be awakened.
Huxley, Religion Without Revelation (1927) ↗ · ¶ 353 — quoted passage in context
Speaking of this feeling in a developed religious consciousness, he writes: "Let us consider the deepest and most fundamental element in all strong and sincerely felt religious emotion. Faith unto Salvation, Trust, Love—all these are there. But over and above these is an element which may also on occasion, quite apart from them, profoundly affect us and occupy the mind with a well-nigh bewildering strength. Let us follow it up with every effort of sympathy and imaginative intuition wherever it is to be found, in the lives of those around us, in sudden, strong ebullitions of personal piety, . . . in the fixed and ordered solemnities of rites and liturgies, and again in the atmosphere that clings to old religious monuments and buildings, to temples and to churches. If we do so we shall find we are dealing with something for which there is only one appropriate expression, *mysterium tremendum*. The feeling of it may at times come sweeping like a gentle tide, pervading the mind with a tranquil mood of deepest worship. It may pass over into a more set and lasting attitude of the soul, . . . until at last it dies away and the soul resumes its 'profane,' non-religious mood of everyday experience. It may burst in sudden eruption up from the depths of the soul with spasms and convulsions, or lead to the strangest excitements, to intoxicated frenzy, to transport, and to ecstasy. It has its wild and demoniac forms and can sink to an almost grisly horror and shuddering. It has its crude, barbaric antecedents and early manifestations, and again it may be developed into something beautiful, pure, and glorious. It may become the hushed, trembling, and speechless humility of the creature in the presence of—whom or what? In the presence of that which is a *Mystery* inexpressible and above all creatures.” I have quoted from Otto at some length, because both the non-rational fact of religious experience and its psychological basis are so clearly put.
7.2 Alexander: deity awaited, worship as co-operation (engaged and refused)
Samuel Alexander is the professional metaphysics nearest “superhumanism,” and the engagement is Stapledon’s own footnote: A Modern Theory of Ethics credits its emergence machinery to a school headed by this book’s author (“All my ideas on this subject are obviously derived from the works of Prof. Alexander…”). Even the school’s method was congenial to a lecturer who forbade shortcuts: Alexander’s Volume I announces that “However immediately we may be aware of God in the religious sentiment, in philosophy there is no short road to deity,” and undertakes to develop the doctrine “consistently with… the sentiment of worship which is directed to God” — worship honoured as a datum the metaphysics must square with, never a proof. The flagship’s §4 weighs the whole relationship, both Gifford volumes now held; this chapter compresses it to the two axes the comparison turns on. Time: Alexander’s deity is prospective — “Deity is the next higher empirical quality to the highest we know,” which the universe “is engaged in bringing to birth”; the world is “big or in travail with deity,” but “infinite deity does not exist” — where the lecture’s Other is present, encountered, saluted now. Reciprocity: Alexander’s God needs us — “The responsiveness of God to man is the most vital and distinctive feature in the religious sentiment”; “If man wants God and depends upon him, God wants man, and is so far dependent”; “Worship is co-operation” — where the salute claims no co-operation, no favour, no return, its object “rightly careless of man and his petty desires.”
A Modern Theory of Ethics (1929) ↗ · ¶ 94 — quoted passage in context
84 A MODERN THEORY OF ETHICS But here let us distinguish between two very different possible kinds of genuine internally teleological activity. (x) Let us call the first kind ‘ direct ’ teleological activity, and define it as activity which, whether or not it violates physical laws, varies in varying circumstances in such manners that a certain state is either attained immediately or maintained all along. For instance, it is conceivable that organisms sometimes preserve their organization even when, by the operation of mere physical laws, they should disintegrate. (2) On the other hand, ‘indirect’ teleo- logical activity may be defined as activity which is capable, not merely of violating physical laws, but also of foregoing an immediate partial attainment of its own regulative end for the sake of a more complete attainment at a later stage. Conscious purposeful activity is obviously of this kind ; but we have no right to assume that consciousness is essential even in this case. It is not wholly inconceivable that this sort of unconscious teleology has contributed to biological evolution. These two possible kinds of activity are very different, and the former is far more intelligible than the latter. But for our purposes both may be included in the concept of internal teleology. Now there may be in the world no such activity. On the other hand many persons suspect very strongly that the activity of living organisms is partly of this kind. Some would account for it in terms of an ‘ entelechy ’ or vital principle interfering with the course of mechanical events. Others would say that at the level of organization which characterizes living things this new way of behaving “emerges ’. For my part I much prefer the latter view ; but this is not the place to discuss emergence.! Here I am only concerned to urge that activity of this kind, defined as teleological, does not necessarily involve any reference (direct or indirect) to consciousness, that it no more involves consciousness than the concept of physical mechanism does. We have become so familiar with the concept of physical mechanism (as Professor Whitehead 1 All my ideas on this subject are obviously derived from the works of Prof. Alexander, Prof. Lloyd Morgan, Prof. Whitehead, and Prof, Broad.
Alexander, Space, Time, and Deity I (1920) ↗ · ¶ 125 · ¶ 222 — quoted passages in context
THE title of this book names what is simplest in the universe, and what is, for us, most complex in it. A very large part of the book will be occupied with the mind ; but I shall endeavour to exhibit minds in the order of realities which begins with mere events in space and time and ends with God. No explanation is needed for leaving the notion of deity to the end. However immediately we may be aware of God in the religious sentiment, in philosophy there is no short road to deity. But I propose in this introductory chapter to explain the reasons why I begin with Space and Time and not with mind ; and by a preliminary and provisional description of the relation of mind to its objects, to show how an inquiry into this secondary topic leads on to the more fundamental one.
Finally, I shall discuss what can be known as to the nature of deity, consistently with the whole scheme of things which we know, and with the sentiment of worship which is directed to God. In attempting this enterprise I can but regret that I am hampered at many points by want of relevant knowledge, especially mathematical and physical knowledge, but it may well be that an outline which is defective in detail may be correct in its general movement. Whether this is so or not I must leave to the result to determine.
Alexander, Space, Time, and Deity II (1920) ↗ · ¶ 1060 · ¶ 1061 · ¶ 1075 · ¶ 1112 · ¶ 1171 · ¶ 1173 · ¶ 1212 — quoted passages in context
Within the all-embracing stuff of Space-Time, the universe exhibits an emergence in Time of successive levels of finite existences, each with its characteristic empirical quality. The highest of these empirical qualities known to us is mind or consciousness. Deity is the next higher empirical quality to the highest we know ; and, as shall presently be observed, at any level of existence there is a next higher empirical quality which stands towards the lower quality as deity stands towards mind. Let us for the moment neglect this wider implication and confine our attention to ourselves. There is an empirical quality which is to succeed the distinctive empirical quality of our level ; and that new empirical quality is deity. If Time were as some have thought a mere form of sense or understanding under which the mind envisages things, this conception would be meaningless and impossible. But Time is an element in the stuff of which the universe and all its parts are made, and has no special relation to mind, which is but the last complexity of Time that is known to us in finite existence. Bare Time in our hypothesis, whose verification has been in progress through each stage of the two preceding Books and will […]
Deity is thus the next higher empirical quality to mind, which the universe is engaged in bringing to birth. That the universe is pregnant with such a quality we are speculatively assured. What that quality is we cannot know ; for we can neither enjoy nor still less contemplate it. Our human altars still are raised to the unknown God. If we could know what deity is, how it feels to be divine, we should first have to have become as gods. What we know of it is but its relation to the other empirical qualities which precede it in time. Its nature we cannot penetrate. We can represent it to ourselves only by analogy. It is fitly described in this analogical manner as the colour of the universe. For colour, we have seen, is a new quality which emerges in material things in attendance on motions of a certain sort. Deity in its turn is a quality which attends upon, or more strictly is equivalent to, previous or lower existences of the order of mind which itself rests on a still lower basis of qualities, and emerges when certain complexities and refinements of arrangement have been reached. Once more I am leaning for help upon Meredith, in whose *Hymn to Colour*, colour takes for a moment the place of what elsewhere he calls Earth : a soul of things which is their last perfection ; whose relation to our soul is that of bridegroom to bride. He figures the relation of our soul to colour under the metaphor of love ; but as I read the poem, deity as the next higher empirical quality is not different from colour as he conceives it ; save only that for him the spirit of the world is timeless, whereas for us deity is like all other empirical qualities a birth of Time and exists in Time, and timelessness is for us a nonentity, and merely a device for contrasting God's infinite deity with the relative imperfection of the finite things we know, a conception which shall appear in due course.
Time engendering within itself in the course of time the series of empirical qualities of which deity is the one next ahead of mind. God is the whole world as possessing the quality of deity. Of such a being the whole world is the ‘body’ and deity is the ‘mind.’ But this possessor of deity is not actual but ideal. As an actual existent, God is the infinite world with its nisus towards deity, or, to adapt a phrase of Leibniz, as big or in travail with deity.
That is a scholastic and trivial question. The other question admits an answer. Does infinite deity exist ? The answer is that the world in its infinity tends towards infinite deity, or is pregnant with it, but that infinite deity does not exist ; and we may now add that if it did, God—the actual world possessing infinite deity—would cease to be infinite God and break up into a multiplicity of finite gods, which would be merely a higher race of creatures than ourselves with a God beyond.
The responsiveness of God to man is the most vital and distinctive feature in the religious sentiment, most patent in the higher religions, but traceable faintly throughout the history of religion. Even in elementary religion, though there is so large an ingredient of fear or awe, there is also the dependence of man upon God. At a more advanced stage we have the consciousness which is described in the language of philosophy or theology as the sense of identity of God and man: "that art thou" in Brahmanism. The current notion represented by T. H. Green in this country of a divine mind which makes human minds *organic* to itself and works through them (a notion affiliated historically to Kant's doctrine of mind or "consciousness as such" (*ueberhaupt*) which is objective, as contrasted with the empirical mind which in Kant's conception is psychological), is not far removed from this older philosophy. This is the pantheistic sense of the divine response, and it tends towards the feeling of absorption in the divine. In the more theistic religious consciousness this responsiveness culminates in the fatherhood of God. In this conception may be traced the primaeval mystery which is the root of religion; for to the child the father is the mysterious something which he discovers to be like himself, a person by whom he is sustained but who issues arbitrary commands which the child must obey. When religion deepens and is moralised, the apparently arbitrary interpositions of God are attributed humbly not to caprice but to good reasons on the part of God, inscrutable still, but a wise and just providence. But also in the feeling of God's fatherhood, the sense of mystery is coupled with and overshadowed by the sense of sustaining love in his relation to his children and of trustful dependence on their part which is not disappointed but, rather, relieved. Whatever God is, and however he is conceived, there is then this affinity between him and us, and in its higher moods the religious mind conceives itself as doing God's work in doing best the work of man ("then most godlike, being most a man"), and conceives God as speaking to man in his conscience or in his passion for truth or beauty.
But the community is one of co-operation. The individual is sustained by trust in God but he wants and claims the help of God as a child his father's, and in turn God reciprocates the worship man pays him and the confidence he reposes in him. There is always the double relationship of need. If man wants God and depends upon him, God wants man, and is so far dependent. Or the same thing may be put otherwise in respect of our feeling of dependence upon God. That feeling is not simply one of helplessness. It is the claim we make for some one to help us. In his admirable book, *The Philosophy of Religion*, Mr. H. Höffding, criticising Schleiermacher's famous reduction of religion to the feeling of dependence, observes that "he does not sufficiently emphasise the point that this dependence is conditioned by an activity, and that it appears at the limits of this activity. Nor does he make it sufficiently obvious that this dependence makes itself felt in the struggle for those values which appear to man to be the highest." 1 In other words, if I understand aright, our dependence is not merely the sense of our feebleness which we discover to be relieved by God, but it is the demand on our part for relief from some one who fulfils our needs and is perfect where we are imperfect. I shall have to speak in the next chapter of whether God is most fitly conceived in the language of values, but apart from this question the above observation appears most just. Even in mysticism this claim for God to satisfy us is retained. Mysticism does not mean utter self-abandonment. It contains, as I remember is remarked somewhere in the book I have been referring to, an element of egotism, which is apparent in the records by St. Theresa of her ecstasies. And indeed a self-abandonment in which there was on one side complete loss and on the other side no gain is scarcely conceivable.
It was this generation of deity from lower stages of existence that made intelligible to us the mutual responsiveness of man and God which religion demands. On the one hand, we finites reach out to God, who is the goal of our desire ; on the other hand, God who is sustained by us¹ meets us with support and the "solution of our uneasiness." Worship is co-operation ; and if our sentiment proceeds from a conation adapted to the universe in its forward tendency, God in his turn is adapted to that conation and satisfies it, and it is as satisfying it that we discover his deity. But if this were the whole case the fatherhood of God, though it would describe the relation of love between the two parties to the religious transaction, would be a singularly inappropriate expression of God's relation to us. It becomes appropriate when we reflect that God's deity is sustained by the whole world, and that the contribution of the individual to it is infinitesimal. Our dependence on God, which partly makes us think of him under the figure of a father, is our sense of how God gathers up for us in his person the whole infinite world to which we belong, so that in trusting ourselves to his divinity we are aware of our continuity with the whole in its divine quality. This is the meaning which may be
Philosophy and Living II (1939) ↗ · ¶ 712 — quoted passage in context
In general the ecstatic experience, which is the mystic's supreme reward, is said to give profound insight into the essential nature of reality, along with a stammering inability to describe *what* has been revealed, save in the most metaphorical and paradoxical terms. Sometimes the reality thus revealed is referred to in terms of dread, and even terror, as the divine and ruthless "Other," rightly careless of man and his petty desires. In some cultures, on the other hand, it is said to be the divine, personified Love, which embraces, or gathers up into itself, the spirit of the individual lover of this all-loving God. In other cultures it appears as the impersonal and wholly dispassionate universal spirit, or the underlying reality which constitutes the unity of all things. One point on which there is general agreement is that in the supreme experience time is in some sense transcended. What is discovered is a reality which is eternal.
What Stapledon kept from the credited school is as instructive as what he dropped. Alexander’s deity is totally unknowable — “Our human altars still are raised to the unknown God”; on each level the next quality “looms ahead, awfully”; it is “not spirit, but something different from it in kind,” not “the perfection of manhood” but “something which transcends in kind the most transcendent manhood” (he mocks the anthropocentric assumption with “a race of seaweeds” reasoning that mind, when it comes, must be seaweed-shaped). The lecture keeps the unknowability whole and even the awe; it also keeps Alexander’s anti-projection psychology (the religious appetite “does not make its object” but “discovers it” — God “correlative to that emotion or sentiment, as food is correlative to appetite,” with the capacity-spectrum in the school’s own idiom, “partially or wholly deity-blind, as he is tone-deaf”). What it refuses are the two consolations: the ladder (deity as our line’s next rung — even Alexander’s finite gods are “merely a higher race of creatures than ourselves with a God beyond”) and the reciprocity. Alexander wrote a superhumanism of waiting and working; the lecture’s is one of meeting and renouncing. And the school’s popular transmission ran through this monograph’s own §5: Haldane’s Epilogue cites Space, Time and Deity by name in the very pages that deify the race-organism — the conversion of emergent deity into a bigger us that Alexander’s “different in kind” expressly forbids, committed by the movement’s most brilliant popularizer in a book Stapledon annotated (§5.2). Stapledon, alone in that company, kept the difference in kind and paid its full price: a deity you cannot join, only salute.
Alexander, Space, Time, and Deity II (1920) ↗ · ¶ 1061 · ¶ 1063 · ¶ 1064 · ¶ 1273 · ¶ 1082 · ¶ 1047 · ¶ 1149 · ¶ 1112 — quoted passages in context
Deity is thus the next higher empirical quality to mind, which the universe is engaged in bringing to birth. That the universe is pregnant with such a quality we are speculatively assured. What that quality is we cannot know ; for we can neither enjoy nor still less contemplate it. Our human altars still are raised to the unknown God. If we could know what deity is, how it feels to be divine, we should first have to have become as gods. What we know of it is but its relation to the other empirical qualities which precede it in time. Its nature we cannot penetrate. We can represent it to ourselves only by analogy. It is fitly described in this analogical manner as the colour of the universe. For colour, we have seen, is a new quality which emerges in material things in attendance on motions of a certain sort. Deity in its turn is a quality which attends upon, or more strictly is equivalent to, previous or lower existences of the order of mind which itself rests on a still lower basis of qualities, and emerges when certain complexities and refinements of arrangement have been reached. Once more I am leaning for help upon Meredith, in whose *Hymn to Colour*, colour takes for a moment the place of what elsewhere he calls Earth : a soul of things which is their last perfection ; whose relation to our soul is that of bridegroom to bride. He figures the relation of our soul to colour under the metaphor of love ; but as I read the poem, deity as the next higher empirical quality is not different from colour as he conceives it ; save only that for him the spirit of the world is timeless, whereas for us deity is like all other empirical qualities a birth of Time and exists in Time, and timelessness is for us a nonentity, and merely a device for contrasting God's infinite deity with the relative imperfection of the finite things we know, a conception which shall appear in due course.
We have not yet asked what the being is which possesses deity. But before attempting to raise the question we may still linger over the quality of deity itself. In the first place it is clear that, while for us men deity is the next higher empirical quality to mind, the description of deity is perfectly general. For any level of existence, deity is the next higher empirical quality. It is therefore a variable quality, and as the world grows in time, deity changes with it. On each level a new quality looms ahead, awfully, which plays to it the part of deity. For us who live upon the level of mind deity is, we can but say, deity. To creatures upon the level of life, deity is still the quality in front, but to us who come later this quality has been revealed as mind. For creatures who possessed only the primary qualities,—mere empirical configurations of space-time,— deity was what afterwards appeared as materiality, and their God was matter, for I am supposing that there is no level of existence nearer to the spatio-temporal than matter. On each level of finite creatures deity is for them some ' unknown ' (though not ' unexperienced ') quality in front, the real nature of which is enjoyed by the creatures of the next level. I do not mean that a material being would in some way think or forecast life ; for there is no thinking in the proper sense till we reach mind. I do not even mean that matter forecasts deity in the sense in which it is sometimes said that to a dog his master is God. For the dog though he may not think, does feel and imagine, and his master is a finite being presented to his senses, for whom he feels attachment. I mean only that corresponding to the sense of a mysterious something which is more than we are and yet is felt in feeling and is conceived by speculation, there is some quality in the purview of material things which lies ahead of material quality. If we think ourselves back into material existence, we should feel ourselves, though matter would be the highest that we know, still swept on in the movement of Time. A merely material universe would not be exhausted by materiality and its lower empirical qualities ; there would still be that restless movement of Time, which is not the mere turning of a squirrel in its cage, but the nisus towards a higher birth. That it is so, events show. How its being so would be ' experienced ' in the material 'soul' may need for its description a greater capacity to strip off human privileges and sympathise with lower experience than most persons, and certainly I, possess.
Having thus realised that the relation of deity to mind is not peculiar to us but arises at each level between the next higher quality and the distinctive quality of that level, we can at once pass to another observation. We cannot tell what is the nature of deity, of our deity, but we can be certain that it is not mind, or if we use the term spirit as equivalent to mind or any quality of the order of mind, deity is not spirit, but something different from it in kind. God, the being which possesses deity, must be *also* spirit, for according to analogy, deity presupposes spirit, just as spirit or mind presupposes in its possessor life, and life physico-chemical material processes. But though God must be spiritual in the same way as he must be living and material and spatio-temporal, his deity is not spirit. To think so would be like thinking that mind is purely life, or life purely physico-chemical. The neural complexity which is equivalent to mind is not merely physiological, but a selected physiological constellation which is the bearer of mind, though it is also physiological, because it has physiological relations to what is purely physiological. That complexity and refinement of spirit which is equivalent to deity is something new, and while it is also spirit it is not merely spirit. Deity is therefore, according to the pattern of the growth of […]
There is a further consequence of the difference between deity as a quality in the hierarchy of qualities and the idea of value. Good and great men seem to us to have in them something divine, and the description is just if it is taken to mean that, being better and greater than the rest of us, they point the way to deity, and prepare the way as leaders in the human contribution to the world-endeavour. Even God himself does not as actual God possess deity attained, but only the nisus towards it. Men of transcendent gifts of perfection are thus in their degree exemplars of this nisus. The description is false if it means that they in any sense possess the divine quality or even adumbrate it. Deity on such conception would be no more than the perfection of manhood, whereas it is something which transcends in kind the most transcendent manhood. The ordinary theism, therefore, when it postulates a human intermediary between us and a God who is conceived as endowed with deity actually attained, acts consistently in believing the intermediator to be more than man, human and divine at once—purchasing consistency at the cost of interposing the conception of a miraculous person without parallel in the world.
Only this proviso must be added. The mental structure of which a portion more complex and subtle is the bearer of deity, must not be thought necessarily to be a human mind or aggregation of such, but only to be of the mental order. To assume it to be of the nature of human mind would be as if a race of seaweeds were to hold that mind when it comes (the quality of deity for seaweeds) must be founded on the life of seaweeds, and minds the offspring of seaweeds. What form the finite god would assume we cannot know, and it is idle to guess. The picture has been drawn merely in order to give some kind of definiteness to the vague idea of a higher quality of existence, deity as founded upon the highest order of existence we know. There is always a danger that such attempts at definiteness where precise knowledge from the nature of the case is out of the question may seem a little ridiculous. Fortunately when we leave the finite god and endeavour to form a conception of the infinite God in his relation to things, we may avail ourselves of what is useful in the picture and avoid the danger of seeming to affect a prevision of how things in the future will come to be. We use the picture merely in order to understand how the whole world can be thought of as possessing deity.
Primarily God must be defined as the object of the religious emotion or of worship. He is correlative to that emotion or sentiment, as food is correlative to appetite. What we worship, that is God. This is the practical or religious approach to God. But it is insufficient for our theoretical needs. It labours under the defect that so far as religion itself is able to assure us, the object of religion, however vitally rooted in human nature, however responsive to its needs, may be disconnected with the rest of the world. God may be but an ennobling fancy, a being whom we project before us in our imagination, in whom to believe may sustain and inspire us and have its own sufficient justification in its effects on our happiness, but to whom no reality corresponds which can be co-ordinated with familiar realities of the world. The appetite for food arises from internal causes, but the food which satisfies it is external and independent of the organism, and it is known to us apart from the satisfaction which it gives to our hunger. The passion for God is no less a real appetite of our nature, but what if it creates the very object which satisfies it ? Always, indeed, the religious emotion believes in the reality of its object, as something greater than man and independent of him, in whom the finite creature may even in some phases of feeling be submerged ; and it would reject as preposterous the suggestion that God may be a fancy with which it plays, like a lover with a dream of perfection. But the religious sentiment itself can supply us with no such theoretical assurance of reality, and it needs to be supplemented with a metaphysical inquiry, what place if any the object of worship occupies in the general scheme of things.
Thus, if this interpretation be correct, the object of religious sentiment is no mere imagination which corresponds to a subjective and possibly illusory movement of mind. We are in perpetual presence of this object, which stimulates us, some of us more, some less ; is sometimes felt and sometimes left unexperienced according to our condition, just as the most appetising luxuries leave us cold when we are satisfied. It may be entirely absent from some who are insensitive to its peculiar flavour or only faintly sensitive; a man may be partially or wholly deity-blind, as he is tone-deaf, or has no attunement with scientific truth: he may lack the emotional suggestibility for deity. Yet most are suggestible to it in their degree, as most see colours and not mere greys. Of this world with its deity in advance it is true to say what James says of "the mystical or the supernatural region": "the unseen region in question is not merely ideal, for it produces effects in this world. When we commune with it, work is actually done upon our finite personality, for we are turned into new men, and consequences in the way of conduct follow in the natural world upon our regenerative change. But that which produces effects within another reality must be termed a reality itself, so I feel as if we had no philosophical excuse for calling the unseen or mystical world unreal." 1 I only demur to calling the mystical world unseen or even mystical. It is partly seen and partly object of thought, but it is its new quality, which is higher than anything we know, that cannot be seen or understood, though its presence in reality is forced upon us both in philosophical conception and in the feeling it evokes in us of itself.
That is a scholastic and trivial question. The other question admits an answer. Does infinite deity exist ? The answer is that the world in its infinity tends towards infinite deity, or is pregnant with it, but that infinite deity does not exist ; and we may now add that if it did, God—the actual world possessing infinite deity—would cease to be infinite God and break up into a multiplicity of finite gods, which would be merely a higher race of creatures than ourselves with a God beyond.
7.3 Whitehead: the fellow-sufferer (quoted and declined)
Whitehead — the other name in the 1929 footnote — supplies the tradition’s tenderest God, and the confrontation is documented on Stapledon’s side. Process and Reality’s consequent nature of God is everything the lecture’s Other is not: “a tender care that nothing be lost”; “the poet of the world, with tender patience leading it by his vision of truth, beauty, and goodness”; “the great companion—the fellow-sufferer who understands”; the “brief Galilean vision of humility” against “the ruling Caesar.” By 1939 Stapledon had read it, expounded it, and copied its most famous sentence into Philosophy and Living — then declined it in the next breath, suspecting the theory of God of being “determined less by logical necessity than by the desire to complete his system by relating it, in however strange a manner, with religious orthodoxy.” He read the tender God as wishful thinking — exercising against the century’s greatest process theologian the same discipline sheet 28 turns on every consolation. (The tiering, per the flagship: nothing documents contact with this book before 1939; the 1934 lecture cannot be read as answering it. And the counter-position has a twist the one-line contrast misses: Whitehead’s God is dipolar, and the primordial pole — valuation “deflected neither by love, nor by hatred, for what in fact comes to pass” — stands nearer the Star Maker, who “neither loved nor had need of love,” than anything else in professional philosophy. Whitehead housed both temperatures in one God and gave the loving pole the last word — “It is as true to say that God creates the World, as that the World creates God”; Stapledon split them and gave the last word to the cold one.)
Whitehead, Process and Reality (1929) ↗ · ¶ 2301 · ¶ 2304 · ¶ 2335 · ¶ 2276 · ¶ 2279 · ¶ 2286 · ¶ 2318 — quoted passages in context
The wisdom of subjective aim prehends every actuality for what it can be in such a perfected system—its sufferings, its sorrows, its failures, its triumphs, its immediacies of joy—woven by rightness of feeling into the harmony of the universal feeling, which is always immediate, always many, always one, always with novel advance, moving onward and never perishing. The revolts of destructive evil, purely self-regarding, are dismissed into their triviality of merely individual facts; and yet the good they did achieve in individual joy, in individual sorrow, in the introduction of needed contrast, is yet saved by its relation to the completed whole. The image—and it is but an image—the image under which this operative growth of God’s nature is best conceived, is that of a tender care that nothing be lost.
[page 526] with productive force, of destructive force with destructive force; it lies in the patient operation of the overpowering rationality of his conceptual harmonization. He does not create the world, he saves it: or, more accurately, he is the poet of the world, with tender patience leading it by his vision of truth, beauty, and goodness.
But the principle of universal relativity is not to be stopped at the consequent nature of God. This nature itself passes into the temporal world according to its gradation of relevance to the various concrescent occasions. There are thus four creative phases in which the universe accomplishes its actuality. There is first the phase of conceptual origination, deficient in actuality, but infinite in its adjustment of valuation. Secondly, there is the temporal phase of physical origination, with its multiplicity of actualities. In this phase full actuality is attained; but there is deficiency in the solidarity of individuals with each other. This phase derives its determinate conditions from the first phase. Thirdly, there is the phase of perfected actuality, in which the many are one everlastingly, without the qualification of any loss either of individual identity or of completeness of unity. In everlastingness, immediacy is reconciled with objective immortality. This phase derives the conditions of its being from the two antecedent phases. In the fourth phase, the creative action completes itself. For the perfected actuality passes back into the temporal world, and qualifies this world so that each temporal actuality includes it as an immediate fact of relevant experience. For the kingdom of heaven is with us today. The action of the fourth phase is the love of God for the world. It is the particular providence for particular occasions. What is done in the world is transformed into a reality in heaven, and the reality in heaven passes back into the world. By reason of this reciprocal relation, the love in the world passes into the love in heaven, and floods back again into the world. In this sense, God is the great companion—the fellow-sufferer who understands.
[page 520] one movement of the human spirit. The brief Galilean vision of humility flickered throughout the ages, uncer- tainly. In the official formulation of the religion it has assumed the trivial form of the mere attribution to the Jews that they cherished a misconception about their Messiah. But the deeper idolatry, of the fashioning of God in the image of the Egyptian, Persian, and Roman imperial rulers, was retained. The Church gave unto God the attributes which belonged exclusively to Caesar.
The history of theistic philosophy exhibits various stages of combination of these three diverse ways of entertaining the problem. There is, however, in the Galilean origin of Christianity yet another suggestion which does not fit very well with any of the three main strands of thought. It does not emphasize the ruling Caesar, or the ruthless moralist, or the unmoved mover. It dwells upon the tender elements in the world, which slowly and in quietness operate by love; and it finds purpose in the present immediacy of a kingdom not of this world. Love neither rules, nor is it unmoved; also it is
[page 522] sider God in the abstraction of a primordial actuality, we must ascribe to him neither fulness of feeling, nor consciousness. He is the unconditioned actuality of conceptual feeling at the base of things; so that, by reason of this primordial actuality, there is an order in the relevance of eternal objects to the process of creation. His unity of conceptual operations is a free creative act, untrammelled by reference to any particular course of things. It is deflected neither by love, nor by hatred, for what in fact comes to pass. The *particularities* of the actual world presuppose *it*; while *it* merely presupposes the *general* metaphysical character of creative advance, of which it is the primordial exemplification. The primordial nature of God is the acquirement by creativity of a primordial character.
It is as true to say that God creates the World, as that the World creates God.
Philosophy and Living II (1939) ↗ · ¶ 628 · ¶ 631 — quoted passages in context
ground or root but the flower of all existence. For "he shares with every new creation its actual world." Thus he has, after all, actuality. "Each temporal occasion embodies God"; and God is "a multiplicity of actual components in process of creation." Not only so, but God is one. For the fulfilment of God's "consequent nature" is a single consciousness, and "the realisation of the actual world in the unity of his nature." Between God and the world there is a reciprocal relation. Each is necessary to the other's being. By reason of this reciprocal relation, "the love in the world passes into the love in heaven, and floods back into the world. In this sense, God is the great companion—the fellow-sufferer who understands."
Apart from the general criticism that it is sometimes impossible to tell whether Whitehead is being very profound or very vague, we must note also that sometimes, for instance in his theory of God, the trend of his argument seems to be determined less by logical necessity than by the desire to complete his system by relating it, in however strange a manner, with religious orthodoxy.
Star Maker (1937) ↗ · ¶ 610 — quoted passage in context
In my agony I cried out against my ruthless maker. I cried out that, after all, the creature was nobler than the creator; for the creature loved and craved love, even from the star that was the Star Maker; but the creator, the Star Maker, neither loved nor had need of love.
7.4 Teilhard: the independent convergence
Pierre Teilhard de Chardin is this monograph’s control experiment: the one rival cosmic superhumanism with which no contact is documented in either direction — and the chronology and the texts’ mutual silence make independence much the most economical conclusion — and therefore the cleanest measure of what the period’s shared materials could produce in two different hands. The independence is documented silence, strongly supported; it is not, and cannot be, a proof of impossibility. The support: The Phenomenon of Man was written in Peking — the held text’s own dateline, “Peking, June 1938” to June 1940 — circulated in mimeograph, and published in French in 1955, five years after Stapledon’s death; the English translation came in 1959. So Stapledon could not have read the published book, and nothing suggests the mimeographs reached him; Teilhard could in principle have met the long-published Stapledon, and no held page shows that he did. “Stapledon” scores zero hits in the held Teilhard (index included); “Teilhard,” “Chardin” and “noosphere” score zero in every held Stapledon text, in the Philosophy and Living reading lists, and in the Crossley biography; “Omega” scores the same zeros in Stapledon’s own held texts and the reading lists, and its one occurrence in Crossley carries no Teilhardian content — the “Alpha and Omega” monogram (Agnes and Olaf) painted on the Simon’s Field ceiling. Mutual silence, verified; impossibility, not claimed. What connects them is third parties: Teilhard quotes, with delight, “some masterly lines recently written by J. B. S. Haldane” — the same Haldane of §5 — on how humanity’s co-operation “may determine what Comte calls a Great Being,” asking his readers to recall the passage when he unveils the Omega Point; he footnotes “that curious book by Wells”; and the modern movement’s own historian files the two men as tributaries of one stream, tracing the singularity’s eschatological version “to the writings of Pierre Teilhard de Chardin” in the same 2005 essay whose genealogy names Stapledon (§9.3). Even Ettinger bridges them, backwards: the 1972 upgrade program quotes “The eminent philosopher, Pierre Teilhard de Chardin” as having “voiced a gloomy and pessimistic view” — misfiling the century’s most extravagant evolutionary optimist as a pessimist because he doubted individual brain improvement (§9.2).
Teilhard, The Phenomenon of Man (1959) ↗ · ¶ 1356 · ¶ 255 · ¶ 1213 — quoted passages in context
*Peking, June 1938-June 1940*
² These pages had been written for some time when I was surprised to find their substance in some masterly lines recently written by J. B. S. Haldane : 'We do not find obvious evidence of life or mind in so-called inert matter, and we naturally study them most easily where they are most completely manifested ; but if the scientific point of view is correct, we shall ultimately find them, at least in rudimentary forms, all through the universe.' And he goes on to add these words which my readers would do well to recall when I come to unveil (with all due reservations and corrections) the perspective of the 'Omega Point' : 'Now, if the co-operation of some thousands of millions of cells in our brain can produce our consciousness, the idea becomes vastly more plausible that the co-operation of humanity, or some sections of it, may determine what Comte calls a Great Being.' (Essay on Science and Ethics in *The Inequality of Man*, Chatto, 1932, p. 113.) What I say is thus not absurd. Moreover, any metaphysician must rejoice to discover that even in the eyes of physics the idea of absolutely brute matter (that is to say, of a pure 'transient') is only a first very rough approximation of our experience.
¹ See for example that curious book by Wells, *The Anatomy of Frustration*, which eloquently bears witness to the faith and the misgivings of modern man.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 1068 — quoted passage in context
"Stapledon's Factory," some of his friends called the house behind his back, both for the industrial look (to British eyes) of all that glass and for the plain, functional appointments of the rooms. The one striking piece of decoration was on the ceiling above the stairs and landing where, on a diamond pattern of pine boards and battens neatly spliced at the angles, there was a green-and-white painted design in which an *A* nestled alongside an *O*—Agnes and Olaf, Alpha and Omega.[5]
Bostrom, “History of Transhumanist Thought” (2005) ↗ · ¶ 45 — quoted passage in context
The singularity idea also comes in a somewhat different eschatological version, which traces its lineage to the writings of Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, a paleontologist and Jesuit theologian who saw an evolutionary telos in the development of an encompassing noosphere (a global consciousness) – via physicist Frank Tipler, who argued that advanced civilizations might come to have a defining influence on the future evolution of the cosmos, and, in the final moments of the Big Crunch, might manage to extract an infinite number of computations by harnessing the sheer energy of the collapsing matter. 25 26 However, while these ideas might appeal to those who fancy a marriage between mysticism and science, they have not caught on either among transhumanists or the larger scientific community. Current cosmological theories indicate that the universe will continue to expand forever (falsifying Tipler’s prediction). But the more general point that the transhumanist might make in this context is that we need to learn to think about “big‐picture questions” without resorting to wishful thinking or mysticism. Big‐picture questions, including ones about our place in the world and the long‐term fate of intelligent life are part of transhumanism; however, these questions should be addressed in a sober, disinterested way, using critical reason and our best available scientific evidence. One reason why such questions are of transhumanist interest is that their answers might affect what outcomes we should expect from our own technological development, and therefore – indirectly – what policies it makes sense for humanity to pursue.
Ettinger, Man into Superman (1972) ↗ · ¶ 61 — quoted passage in context
So far, the goal of superhumanity for ourselves--for living individuals of our generation—seems to be shared by scarcely anyone outside of the cryonics societies, by not a single philosopher, scientist, or writer of acknowledged status and immediate influence. For most of the touted "thinkers," even superhumanity for our descendants is viewed ambivalently and erratically. The eminent philosopher, Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, for example, voiced a gloomy and pessimistic view: "It may well be that in its individual capacities and penetrations our brain has reached its organic limits." And, "After the long series of transformations leading to man, has the world stopped? Or if we are still moving, is it not merely in a circle?" He thought future progress might be mainly collective and spiritual.168 But he also had a higher, if wavering, vision:
The convergence is structural and deep. Both men built cosmic evolution toward a communal-mind summit. Teilhard’s noosphere climax is “a harmonised collectivity of consciousnesses equivalent to a sort of super-consciousness,” the earth “becoming enclosed in a single thinking envelope so as to form, functionally, no more than a single vast grain of thought on the sidereal scale” — structurally the closest thing in the held corpus to Star Maker’s cosmical mind, arrived at with no documented contact. Both reject the single superman by name: Teilhard dismisses the expectation that the superman will be “an offshoot from a single bud of mankind” — “The outcome of the world… the entry into the super-human — these are not thrown open to a few of the privileged nor to one chosen people… They will open only to an advance of all together” — as the lecture’s third world dismisses “a brotherhood of equal supermen,” though on opposite grounds (Teilhard: nobody may be excluded; the sheets: capacities vary in rank). Both put worship at the centre of the cosmos’s business, against every maker-superhumanism of §§2–6.
Teilhard, The Phenomenon of Man (1959) ↗ · ¶ 1139 · ¶ 1075 · ¶ 1110 — quoted passages in context
We are faced with a harmonised collectivity of consciousnesses equivalent to a sort of super-consciousness. The idea is that of the earth not only becoming covered by myriads of grains of thought, but becoming enclosed in a single thinking envelope so as to form, functionally, no more than a single vast grain of thought on the sidereal scale, the plurality of individual reflections grouping themselves together and reinforcing one another in the act of a single unanimous reflection.
Less theoretical and less extreme, but all the more insidious, is another doctrine of ' progress by isolation ' which, at this very moment, is fascinating large sections of mankind—the doctrine of the selection and election of races. Flattering to collective egotism, keener, nobler and more easily aroused than individual egotism, racialism has the virtue in its perspectives of accepting and extending rigorously, just as they occur, the lines of the tree of life. What indeed does the history of the animate world show us but a succession of ramifications, springing up one after the other, one on the top of the other, through the success and domination of a privileged group ? And why should we be exempt from the general rule ? Why should there not be once again between us the struggle for life and the survival of the fittest ; the trial of strength ? The superman should, like any other stem, be an offshoot from a single bud of mankind.
The outcome of the world, the gates of the future, the entry into the super-human—these are not thrown open to a few of the privileged nor to one chosen people to the exclusion of all others. They will open only to an advance of *all together*, in a direction in which *all together*1 can join and find completion in a spiritual renovation of the earth, a renovation whose physical degree of reality we must now consider and whose outline we must make clearer.
And then the divergence, which is the sharpest single contrast this monograph has to offer, because everything else is held constant. Teilhard’s summit is personal and loving: “the Universal and Personal… grow in the same direction and culminate simultaneously in each other”; “Love alone is capable of uniting living beings in such a way as to complete and fulfil them”; Omega must be “loving and lovable” now, not at the end. The Star Maker “neither loved nor had need of love,” and the mature Stapledon position holds that the truly religious man is content that the dread mystery be “rightly careless of man.” And the difference of temperature is underwritten by a difference of logic: Teilhard’s system cannot survive total death — reflective evolution excludes extinction, “a total death, an unscalable wall, on which consciousness would crash and then for ever disappear,” being for him “‘incompossible’ with the mechanism of conscious activity” — where Stapledon’s whole discipline is built on accepting precisely that wall (the Last Men’s “Great are the stars, and man is of no account to them” is the salute’s home key). Teilhard needs the universe to guarantee the outcome; Stapledon’s worship requires no guarantee at all. The Jesuit’s Epilogue resolves the system into confessional Christianity — “In that final vision the Christian dogma culminates” — exactly the doctrine-shaped consolation the salute forbids itself. Same decade, same evolutionary cosmos, same communal summit, worship at the centre of both: one made the summit a lover to be met, the other forbade himself the meeting. That both positions exist proves the period’s materials determined neither; the choice between them is the residue this monograph exists to isolate — and it is a choice about consolation, not about cosmology.
Teilhard, The Phenomenon of Man (1959) ↗ · ¶ 1171 · ¶ 1192 · ¶ 1207 · ¶ 1046 · ¶ 1329 — quoted passages in context
Seen from this point of view, the universe, without losing any of its immensity and thus without suffering any anthropomorphism, begins to take shape : since to think it, undergo it and make it act, it is *beyond* our souls that we must look, *not the other way round*. In the perspective of a noogenesis, time and space become truly humanised—or rather super-humanised. Far from being mutually exclusive, the Universal and Personal (that is to say, the ' centred ') grow in the same direction and culminate simultaneously in each other.
We are distressed and pained when we see modern attempts at human collectivisation ending up, contrary to our expectations and theoretical predictions, in a lowering and an enslavement of consciousnesses. But so far how have we gone about the business of unification? A material situation to be defended; a new industrial field to be opened up, better conditions for a social class or less favoured nations—those are the only and very mediocre grounds on which we have so far tried to get together. There is no cause to be surprised if, in the footsteps of animal societies, we become mechanised in the very play of association. Even in the supremely intellectual activity of science (at any rate as long as it remains purely speculative and abstract) the impact of our souls only operates obliquely and indirectly. Contact is still superficial, involving the danger of yet another servitude. Love alone is capable of uniting living beings in such a way as to complete and fulfil them, for it alone takes them and joins them by what is deepest in themselves. This is a fact of daily experience. At what moment do lovers come into the most complete possession of themselves if not when they say they are lost in each other? In truth, does not love every instant achieve all around us, in the couple or the team, the magic feat, the feat reputed to be contradictory, of 'personalising' by totalising? And if that is what it can achieve daily on a small scale, why should it not repeat this one day on world-wide dimensions?
First of all the *reason of Love*. Expressed in terms of internal energy, the cosmic function of Omega consists in initiating and maintaining within its radius the unanimity of the world's ' reflective ' particles. But how could it exercise this action were it not in some sort loving and lovable *at this very moment* ? Love, I said, dies in contact with the impersonal and the anonymous. With equal infallibility it becomes impoverished with remoteness in space—and still more, much more, with difference in time. For love to be possible there must be coexistence. Accordingly, however marvellous its foreseen figure, Omega could never even so much as equilibrate the play of human attractions and repulsions if it did not act with equal force, that is to say with the same stuff of proximity. With love, as with every other sort of energy, it is within the existing datum that the lines of force must at every instant come together. Neither an ideal centre, nor a potential centre could possibly suffice. A present and real noosphere goes with a real and present centre. To be supremely attractive, Omega must be supremely present.
Hence this remarkable situation—that our mind, by the very fact of being able to discern infinite horizons ahead, is only able to move by the hope of achieving, through something of itself, a supreme consummation—without which it would rightly feel itself to be stunted, frustrated and cheated. By the nature of the work, and correlatively by the requirement [*exigence*] of the worker, a total death, an unscalable wall, on which consciousness would crash and then for ever disappear, are thus ' incompossible ' with the mechanism of conscious activity (since it would immediately break its mainspring).
The universe fulfilling itself in a synthesis of centres in perfect conformity with the laws of union. God, the Centre of centres. In that final vision the Christian dogma culminates. And so exactly, so perfectly does this coincide with the Omega Point that doubtless I should never have ventured to envisage the latter or formulate the hypothesis rationally if, in my consciousness as a believer, I had not found not only its speculative model but also its living reality.
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 741 — quoted passage in context
Great are the stars, and man is of no account to them. But man is a fair spirit, whom a star conceived and a star kills. He is greater than those bright blind companies. For though in them there is incalculable potentiality, in him there is achievement, small, but actual. Too soon, seemingly, he comes to his end. But when he is done he will not be nothing, not as though he had never been; for he is eternally a beauty in the eternal form of things.
(A last convergence note for completeness: Julian Huxley, §9.1’s coiner of “transhumanism,” is the documented junction between the two worlds — the man who sponsored Teilhard into English in 1959, his introduction calling it “a very remarkable work by a very remarkable human being,” recording that “in 1925 he coined the term” noosphere, and observing — the sentence that ties this whole shelf together — that Teilhard “quotes with approval Nietzsche’s view that man is unfinished and must be surpassed or completed.” The evolutionary humanist of the 1946 sheets, the rival Catholic cosmic superhumanism, and the Nietzschean ambition, in one introduction: the streams this monograph separates were braided by the period itself.)
Teilhard, The Phenomenon of Man (1959) ↗ · ¶ 51 · ¶ 59 · ¶ 58 — quoted passages in context
*The Phenomenon of Man* is a very remarkable work by a very remarkable human being. Père Teilhard de Chardin was at the same time a Jesuit Father and a distinguished palaeontologist. In *The Phenomenon of Man* he has effected a threefold synthesis—of the material and physical world with the world of mind and spirit ; of the past with the future ; and of variety with unity, the many with the one. He achieves this by examining every fact and every subject of his investigation *sub specie evolutionis*, with reference to its development in time and to its evolutionary position. Conversely, he is able to envisage the whole of knowable reality not as a static mechanism but as a process. In consequence, he is driven to search for human significance in relation to the trends of that enduring and comprehensive process ; the measure of his stature is that he so largely succeeded in the search. I would like to introduce *The Phenomenon of Man* to English readers by attempting a summary of its general thesis, and of what appear to me to be its more important conclusions.
Père Teilhard was keenly aware of the importance of vivid and arresting terminology. Thus in 1925 he coined the term *noosphere* to denote the sphere of mind, as opposed to, or rather superposed on, the biosphere or sphere of life, and acting as a transforming agency promoting hominisation (or as I would put it, progressive psychosocial evolution). He may perhaps be criticised for not defining the term more explicitly. By *noosphere* did he intend simply the total pattern of thinking organisms (i.e. human beings) and their activity, including the patterns of their interrelations : or did he intend the special environment of man, the systems of organised thought and its products in which men move and have their being, as fish swim and reproduce in rivers and the sea ?^1 Perhaps it might have been better to restrict *noosphere* to the first-named sense, and to use something like *noosystem* for the second. But certainly *noosphere* is a valuable and thought-provoking word.
With this approach he is rightly and indeed inevitably driven to the conclusion that, since evolutionary phenomena (of course including the phenomenon known as man) are processes, they can never be evaluated or even adequately described solely or mainly in terms of their origins : they must be defined by their direction, their inherent possibilities (including of course also their limitations), and their deducible future trends. He quotes with approval Nietzsche's view that man is unfinished and must be surpassed or completed ; and proceeds to deduce the steps needed for his completion.
8. The inversion: worship of the nonhuman, upgrade of the human
Now the centre, with the rivals arrayed around it. Every stream in §§2–6 conjugates one verb: improve — breed the stock, will the next man, engineer the body, join the organism, school the utopia. The 1934 lecture conjugates a different verb entirely, and the whole comparison comes down to the fact that the two verbs are not rivals for one object but different relations to different objects. You upgrade the human. You worship the nonhuman. Stapledon’s scandal — on that platform, against this shelf — was to insist that both verbs are legitimate and that neither can do the other’s work.
8.1 The definition, and the four worlds
Primary source: the notes for this movement (sheets 9–11) — diplomatic transcription; every sheet links to its scan — sheets: 9 · 10 · 11
8 ½
ð starving man craves food as a great good
(it is his nature to eat
& his nature is unfulfilled)
& but he may not have ð strength or resolution—
to go in search of food
ð mentally starving man sees ð Humanistic Goal as good
if he has it in him to apprehend it
but he may lack strength or resolution
or be side tracked by easier goods
Questions raised by ð Humanistic Ideal (thus stated)
Aristocracy or Democracy?
should ð aim be
all to some extent1, to give all men equal opportunity for fulfilmentˎ
even if this involves low personal attainment
a few extremelyor 2. to secure ð highest possible attainment for a few
even if this involves slavery for most ?
i.e is ð goal finally ð fulfilling of all particular individuals
or is it ð achievement of a form of mind
by means of individuals ?
ð practical question
“in” premachine age— impossible to afford fulness to all
but machinery, mechanization—
might enable all to attain fulness
each up to ð limit of his capacity,
a well-ordered mechanized world—
should make ð best possible of everyman
i.e. up to capacity
9.13
but though mechanization solves θ practical dilemma
(i e makes human fulfilment possible to all)
yet θ theoretical dilemma remains:
Is Meanis the ideally awakened world —
an endgood because it is implied in actual humanbeings?
or a means?or is it good in itself, absolutely?
↘& are individuals instrumental?
Consider some hypothetical examples
1. a world of mediocre beings
exercising their mediocre powers fully
2. a world of many abject slaves & a few splendidly fulfilled
(i e attaining high degree of humanity)
3. a brotherhood of equal supermen
4. a world of many subordinates, but fulfilling their powers,
& a few supermen attaining humanity
consideration of these brings out an important fact
1. θ mediocre world — we condemn it as a failure
2. θ aristocratic-slave-world — we condemn as
violating human brotherhood unity, &
θ sense of obligation to others
3. θ brotherhood of supermen — impossible
∵ capacities vary in rank
4. a world of hierarchical free exercise of powers
does not violate social obligation
yet does justice to θ ideal
10 14
[stitching holes — damage, not writing]
Upshot of this discussion of Humanism
for ð
thorough-going
humanist ∧1. satisfaction of felt need is not enough
(ð mediocre world is condemned)
2. but perfection of ð few at ð expense of ð many —
is equally condemned
∴ (a) it violates love, & justice
(b) ð few cannot accept it & be perfect
3. yet finally we judge in relation to ð humanistic ideal
approximation toward ð ideal form of Man
×4. and for ourselves, each as an individual —
we recognize ðt when we are most vital —
(i.e at our most human
" awakened, spiritually)
×we are ready to be sacrificed —
for ð humanistic ideal
i.e. if by being sacrificed I could contribute
then I ought to be sacrificed
⊙
and so ought all men⊙I ought willingly to sacrifice myself
Yet:equally — (of course)
none may sacrificeif I could contribute to happiness of others
another
against his willI ought to be sacrificed
×But:
I accept this out of comradeship
I accept ð other out of devotion,
further:
meaningless for all to “die” for one another
but: all might have to “die” for ð Ideal
(out of human unity)
The definitional sheets (§1) make the Other’s non-identity with any improved man explicit from the first: the worship that starts superhumanism is of “a nonhuman Other,” conceived as “gods, Fate, God, Nature, a Principle of Order, the Whole etc.” — a list with no supermen in it. But the lecture does not therefore dismiss improvement; it runs the improver’s question with complete seriousness, in the four hypothetical worlds of sheets 9–11 (the flagship’s §2.3 reads them as thumbnail civilizations from Last and First Men): the mediocre world condemned; the slave-plus-splendid world condemned for “violating human unity and the sense of obligation”; the third world — “a brotherhood of equal supermen” — ruled impossible, “∵ capacities vary in rank”; and the fourth, a hierarchical world where many subordinates fulfil their powers and a few attain the heights, endorsed as the one that “does not violate social obligation” yet does justice to the ideal (sheet 10). This is the improver’s problem solved in the improver’s terms — rank admitted, hierarchy accepted, mechanization invoked as the mitigation — and it is still not the lecture’s religion. The four worlds all live on the human story’s inside. The lecture’s decisive move comes after them: even the best world on the list — even a cosmos of fulfilled supermen — would still stand under something not itself, and its crowning activity would still be to recognize that. Improvement answers “what shall man become?”; worship answers “what is man for?” — and the sheets refuse to let the first question absorb the second.
8.2 The salute, and man’s function
Primary source: the notes for this movement (sheets 26–28) — diplomatic transcription; every sheet links to its scan — sheets: 26 · 27 · 28
21
(c) Rational considerations supporting Superhumanism
distinguish two sorts of rationalism —
petty-fogging, & ex “ð larger Rationalism”
Pettifogging Rationalism, dogmatic
craves certainty, & slick interpretation
accepts human reason uncritically
& current science
tends to deny what it cannot cope with
ð larger Rationalism, sceptical
its spirit is “Reasonableness”
rather than “rationality”
does not mistake probability for certainty
(or slight possibility “ “
regarding human experience in this spirit —
we find sheer humanism unsatisfying
∵ it shuts ð windows, draws ð blinds
& seeks artificial elegance
oblivious of ð outer night & ð stars
instead, we boldly go out into ð darkness
& we find — ð superhuman everywhere
ð magnitudes of astranomy
(aeons, expanding space
gigantic inconceivables,
Relativity, star-dust
ð minutiae of sub atomic physics
& basic physical mystery of —
-electrons etc
overwhelming sense of ð Vast Inhuman
& that all our knowledge of it is mythical
21A
we find also —
θ story of θ evolution of life
its length, wastefulness
precariousness, chanciness
its progressive release of potentiality
its incomprehensibility
& ourselves as moments in it
we find: θ significance of θ distinctively human
⊙ conviction θ —as an achievement of evolution ⊙
man is transitionalθ great Other includes Man
& scarcely a beginningwe ourselves constitute —
even, But doomed?θ chief mystery for us #
θ fact of our awareness
# butour implication in θ physical
our mysteryour desiring this, not that
has a significanceour varying awakeness ⊕
θ reaches beyondour beginning & ending
θ human sphereour relationships together
⊕ our striving towardour intelligence & imagination.
spiritualitybearing all this in mind —
& also θ present growing humility of Science —
is it reasonable to blinker oneself with humanism?
is not concern with θ superhuman θ way of life?
( though a dangerous way)
21
B
But though ð larger rationalism —
points beyond sheer Humanism,
it should also restrain us from all doctrine
(through realisation of ð Other's vastness
& ð limitations of our thought
& ð snares of wish fulfilment)
we may be tempted to say—
“surely then there must be a God”
a personal God, & benevolent
& ∴ all is well, immortality etc etc
but we must not.
we must outgrow ð craving for security
& ð desire to have salvation
We may say only —
Xthat I am aware of an unspeakable Beauty,& Majesty
which I salute though it destroy me.
I can say no more about it,
but only about its effects on me.
— I am aware also of ð claims of altruism,
& of the humanistic ideal
But their
final
justification
is man's
function
as worshipper→These are the objects of practical loyalty.
I ought to serve them unswervingly
— Yet — if fate goes against them,
if I suffer,
if my beloved suffer,
if all men are tortured,
even if ð human race is destroyed,—
I must salute ð Supreme Beauty
which I see
The second half of the answer is on sheets 26–28, and its grammar is present-tense throughout. Not “there will be” but “we find — ð superhuman everywhere” (sheet 26); not a promised next quality but an encountered one: “I am aware of an unspeakable Beauty, & Majesty, which I salute though it destroy me. I can say no more about it, but only about its effects on me” (sheet 28, the “& Majesty” a diagonal insertion — dread’s element joined to fascination’s, as the flagship notes with Otto’s majestas in view). The margin of sheet 27 fixes man’s position in one clause — “man is transitional & scarcely a beginning” — and, double-underlined beside it, the clause every maker-superhumanism on this shelf would have to deny: “θ great Other includes Man.” The Other is not downstream of us; we are a local event inside it. From that, the discipline: no petition (the salute asks nothing), no doctrine (“we must outgrow ð craving for security & ð desire to have salvation”), and no exemption for the improved — the splendid race, the noosphere, the mechanized minds and the samurai would all stand exactly where we stand, saluting something that owes them nothing.
Primary source: the notes for this movement (sheet 30) — diplomatic transcription; every sheet links to its scan
23
θ psychology of this heightened temper
1. presupposes a degree of sensibility
(θ spirit’s eyes must be open)
2. but what is revealed awakens θ ff spirit further
(cp in sleep, sensitive to sound
⊙
sense ofbut θ bell wakes one)
θ Presented3. θ final result: ⊙ conduct raised to a new plane,
Other,
a Presence,a finer adjustment to circumstances
It. Reality(cp effects of coffee on thought processes)
terrible -
we become more able to live with style
beautiful.(instead of sloppily)
participation
in It,to get θ best out of ourselves
in θ Real∴ everything seems more worth while
at once more energy & more detachment
i e more strength for serving θ Ideal
(θ Human Ideal).
× & more detachment —
in success & in failure
detachment not only from self but from Man
⊕∴ we feel man to be so small
Instrumental to —
what?& to be finally instrumental, ⊕
To worship& out of this humility —
To worship& comes a new dignity
To apprehending,which θ sheer Humanist must lack,
& enjoying θ universeθ dignity which comes of —
& thus -free subordination of oneself
contributing?to something more admirable
a distinctive beauty
And then the function. On sheet 30 the margin answers the question the whole evening has circled — what is man for? — and the manuscript preserves the hesitation: “To worship,” struck out; then, double-underlined, “To worship” restored, beside “out of this humility — comes a new dignity.” Man’s office, in the 1934 position, is to be the universe’s local organ of awareness and praise. Every rival stream in this monograph gives man a different office: breeder of the higher (Galton), father of the Superman (Shaw), engineer of transcendence (Bernal), cell of the deity (Haldane), citizen of Utopia (Wells), ancestor of Omega’s convergence (Teilhard, with worship — the one rival who shares the verb). The inversion is complete and symmetrical against the maker streams of §§2–6: where they make the superhuman the product of man’s work, the lecture makes man the instrument of the superhuman’s recognition — “finally instrumental,” in the sheets’ own idiom, but instrumental to praise, not production. (The cosmic-religious stream of §7 is exempt by construction — its superhuman was never a product — which is why its four members needed a chapter of finer measurements.)
The fiction wrote the inversion out twice, on either side of the lecture, and the two texts fix its range. In the abandoned Nebula Maker draft (c. 1933), the communal summit is hoped for in exactly the maker’s grammar this monograph has been tracking — from the nebulae’s cosmical dance “there might emerge an oversoul or single spirit of the cosmos” — the one occurrence of that word in Stapledon’s held prose, and its verb is might emerge: even his own communal mind is a project, never a given. What is given, in the same draft, is the terrible creator its narrator is “compelled to worship” and cannot love. The two objects never merge: what we build is ours and finite; what we salute is neither. An American control-text, acquired for this monograph, fixes how un-mystical that grammar is (strictly comparison-tier: no contact with the essay is documented, though Crossley notes Emerson volumes among his mother’s books — ambience, not evidence). Emerson’s Over-Soul is the given unity — “that Unity, that Over-soul, within which every man’s particular being is contained and made one with all other” — present, accessible, guaranteed: “The simplest person who in his integrity worships God, becomes God.” Stapledon’s oversoul might emerge; his God is never become, and the verbal rhyme between the two writers is the whole difference in five words each: Emerson closes “I, the imperfect, adore my own Perfect” — the imperfect owns its Perfect — while Star Maker’s summit self-names as “I, the imperfect cosmical mind,” expects the Star Maker to “stoop to meet me and raise me and enfold me,” and is refused. Mystical monism dissolves the distance; the maker-superhumanisms abolish the object by producing it; the 1934 position alone keeps both terms and the gap between them, and calls the keeping worship. Waking World, the lecture’s own year, gives the doctrine its sharpest comparative sentence — “even to worship a loving God is really to worship our own nature made perfect… That is just where the trouble lies” — which rules out in one clause Coit’s Spirit of Man, Shaw’s Superman, Haldane’s race-deity, Alexander’s co-operating God, Whitehead’s companion, and (unknowingly, by exact anticipation) Teilhard’s loving Omega. The rest of the sixteen-year record — Odd John’s colony dying in its “accepted spiritual task of worship” (§6.2 quotes the ending whole), the war pamphlet’s agnostic piety under bombardment, Star Maker’s rebuffed bridal expectation at cosmological scale — is the internal genealogy the flagship’s §3.6–§3.10 own sheet by sheet and book by book, and it stays theirs; this monograph’s business is only to note that the position holds its shape against every external rival for sixteen documented years.
Nebula Maker (1933) ↗ · ¶ 294 · ¶ 36 — quoted passages in context
Now there were two views as to the kind of thing the cosmical dance pattern should be. According to one party it should be stately and restrained; and the course of each nebula should lie wholly within his own group. The cosmos should become a lovely pattern of distinct minuet figures. According to the other much larger party the cosmic dance must be far more violent. It must symbolize and commemorate by its far-flung measures the conflicts and agonies of the past. Only by an extravagance of swift intricate movement could it by potent suggestiveness waken the nebulae to a new order of percipience, intelligence and creative power. Moreover it was hoped that from the ecstasy born in every heart by means of this superb communal activity there might emerge an oversoul or single spirit of the cosmos, in whose exalted experience every individual nebula should participate.
Yet as I watched I was compelled to worship.
Crossley, Speaking for the Future (1994) ↗ · ¶ 257 — quoted passage in context
Although Willie had not gone to a university and had had only a modest systematic education before going out to Port Said to work for his father, he had an amateur’s passion for the classics and for science. Alongside the volumes of Carlyle, Ruskin and Emerson, Bunyan, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, and George Macdonald that represented Emmeline’s tastes, were Willie’s set of Greek and Roman translations, a complete Shakespeare, and works by Darwin, Huxley, Lockyer, and Tyndall. He kept fastidious notebooks for copying out long extracts from his scientific reading, and in the early years of his marriage he set problems for Emmeline to solve—and she dutifully wrote out answers.
Emerson, “The Over-Soul” (1841) ↗ · ¶ 9 · ¶ 35 · ¶ 37 — quoted passages in context
The Supreme Critic on the errors of the past and the present, and the only prophet of that which must be, is that great nature in which we rest as the earth lies in the soft arms of the atmosphere; that Unity, that Over-soul, within which every man’s particular being is contained and made one with all other; that common heart of which all sincere conversation is the worship, to which all right action is submission; that overpowering reality which confutes our tricks and talents, and constrains every one to pass for what he is, and to speak from his character and not from his tongue, and which evermore tends to pass into our thought and hand and become wisdom and virtue and power and beauty. We live in succession, in division, in parts, in particles. Meantime within man is the soul of the whole; the wise silence; the universal beauty, to which every part and particle is equally related; the eternal ONE. And this deep power in which we exist and whose beatitude is all accessible to us, is not only self-sufficing and perfect in every hour, but the act of seeing and the thing seen, the seer and the spectacle, the subject and the object, are one. We see the world piece by piece, as the sun, the moon, the animal, the tree; but the whole, of which these are the shining parts, is the soul. Only by the vision of that Wisdom can the horoscope of the ages be read, and by falling back on our better thoughts, by yielding to the spirit of prophecy which is innate in every man, we can know what it saith. Every man’s words who speaks from that life must sound vain to those who do not dwell in the same thought on their own part. I dare not speak for it. My words do not carry its august sense; they fall short and cold. Only itself can inspire whom it will, and behold! their speech shall be lyrical, and sweet, and universal as the rising of the wind. Yet I desire, even by profane words, if I may not use sacred, to indicate the heaven of this deity and to report what hints I have collected of the transcendent simplicity and energy of the Highest Law.
Ineffable is the union of man and God in every act of the soul. The simplest person who in his integrity worships God, becomes God; yet for ever and ever the influx of this better and universal self is new and unsearchable. It inspires awe and astonishment. How dear, how soothing to man, arises the idea of God, peopling the lonely place, effacing the scars of our mistakes and disappointments! When we have broken our god of tradition and ceased from our god of rhetoric, then may God fire the heart with his presence. It is the doubling of the heart itself, nay, the infinite enlargement of the heart with a power of growth to a new infinity on every side. It inspires in man an infallible trust. He has not the conviction, but the sight, that the best is the true, and may in that thought easily dismiss all particular uncertainties and fears, and adjourn to the sure revelation of time the solution of his private riddles. He is sure that his welfare is dear to the heart of being. In the presence of law to his mind he is overflowed with a reliance so universal that it sweeps away all cherished hopes and the most stable projects of mortal condition in its flood. He believes that he cannot escape from his good. The things that are really for thee gravitate to thee. You are running to seek your friend. Let your feet run, but your mind need not. If you do not find him, will you not acquiesce that it is best you should not find him? for there is a power, which, as it is in you, is in him also, and could therefore very well bring you together, if it were for the best. You are preparing with eagerness to go and render a service to which your talent and your taste invite you, the love of men and the hope of fame. Has it not occurred to you that you have no right to go, unless you are equally willing to be prevented from going? O, believe, as thou livest, that every sound that is spoken over the round world, which thou oughtest to hear, will vibrate on thine ear! Every proverb, every book, every byword that belongs to thee for aid or comfort, shall surely come home through open or winding passages. Every friend whom not thy fantastic will but the great and tender heart in thee craveth, shall lock thee in his embrace. And this because the heart in thee is the heart of all; not a valve, not a wall, not an intersection is there anywhere in nature, but one blood rolls uninterruptedly an endless circulation through all men, as the water of the globe is all one sea, and, truly seen, its tide is one.
[…] men, but, absolutely speaking, that we have none; that we have no history, no record of any character or mode of living that entirely contents us. The saints and demigods whom history worships we are constrained to accept with a grain of allowance. Though in our lonely hours we draw a new strength out of their memory, yet, pressed on our attention, as they are by the thoughtless and customary, they fatigue and invade. The soul gives itself, alone, original and pure, to the Lonely, Original and Pure, who, on that condition, gladly inhabits, leads and speaks through it. Then is it glad, young and nimble. It is not wise, but it sees through all things. It is not called religious, but it is innocent. It calls the light its own, and feels that the grass grows and the stone falls by a law inferior to, and dependent on, its nature. Behold, it saith, I am born into the great, the universal mind. I, the imperfect, adore my own Perfect. I am somehow receptive of the great soul, and thereby I do Overlook the sun and the stars and feel them to be the fair accidents and effects which change and pass. More and more the surges of everlasting nature enter into me, and I become public and human in my regards and actions. So come I to live in thoughts and act with energies which are immortal. Thus revering the soul, and learning, as the ancient said, that “its beauty is immense,” man will come to see that the world is the perennial miracle which the soul worketh, and be less astonished at particular wonders; he will learn that there is no profane history; that all history is sacred; that the universe is represented in an atom, in a moment of time. He will weave no longer a spotted life of shreds and patches, but he will live with a divine unity. He will cease from what is base and frivolous in his life and be content with all […]
Star Maker (1937) ↗ · ¶ 548 · ¶ 605 — quoted passages in context
WHILE the awakened galaxies were striving to make full use of the last phase of their lucid consciousness, while I, the imperfect cosmical mind, was thus striving, I began to have a strange new experience. I seemed to be telepathically stumbling upon some being or beings of an order that was at first quite incomprehensible to me.
But this image, this symbol that my cosmical mind had conceived under the stress of inconceivable experience, broke and was transformed in the very act of my conceiving it, so inadequate was it to the actuality of the experience. Harking back in my blindness to the moment of my vision, I now conceived that the star which was the Star Maker, and the immanent center of all existence, had been perceived as looking down on me, his creature, from the height of his infinitude; and that when I saw him I immediately spread the poor wings of my spirit to soar up to him, only to be blinded and seared and struck down. It had seemed to me in the moment of my vision that all the longing and hope of all finite spirits for union with the infinite spirit were strength to my wings. It seemed to me that the Star, my Maker, must surely stoop to meet me and raise me and enfold me in his radiance. For it seemed to me that I, the spirit of so many worlds, the flower of so many ages, was the Church Cosmical, fit at last to be the bride of God. But instead I was blinded and seared and struck down by terrible light.
Waking World (1934) ↗ · ¶ 266 — quoted passage in context
conceived in this way, should be the one object of our loyalty. He may perhaps even feel that what matters most in the universe is this age-long adventure of waking into the most clear-sighted and large-hearted aliveness, of waking into the full, the true ‘humanity’, whether this is to be achieved by our own species or by beings alien to ourselves in remote parts of the universe. Yet there is something else to take into account, something more difficult to describe. The worship of mankind or, as I would rather call it, loyalty in the human enterprise, is indeed part of the true and wholly satisfying and most alive kind of worship; and Christian love of our fellow men is also part of it. But I at least cannot feel that love of our fellows and loyalty in the great adventure of mankind together make up the whole of religion. For, after all, to worship mankind is only to worship ourselves. For mankind is nothing but all of us together, striving in our different ways to make the best of life. Indeed, even to worship a loving God is really to worship our own nature made perfect. All the characters which are attributed to a benevolent and almighty and omniscient deity are idealizations of the distinctively human capacities. That is just where the trouble lies. We are so easily trapped into thinking that our own nature, perfected, is the finest thing there is, or can be. When a man is in the mood of unqualified loyalty to mankind, the thought may occur to him that, sooner or later, even if men do succeed at last in making the really splendid human world which at present we can only dimly imagine, that world will almost certainly be destroyed. There are many ways in which it might come to an end, but one way, if the others are avoided, seems almost inevitable. Our sun will cool, and his planets will be frozen. Even if men were to escape from the solar system, which is unlikely, wherever they were to go, they would be faced sooner or later with a
Odd John (1935) ↗ · ¶ 239 — quoted passage in context
too impoverished, spiritually, for our real work. But as things are, surely the wise course is to forego the weapon, and make up our minds to fulfil as much as possible of our accepted spiritual task of worship before we are destroyed.” I could tell by merely watching the faces of the islanders that they were now in the throes of a conflict of wills such as they had never before experienced. The issue was not merely one of life and death; it was one of fundamental principle. When Shên Kuo had done, there was a clamour of protest and argument, much of which was actually vocal; for the islanders were deeply moved. It was soon agreed that the decision should be postponed for a day. Meanwhile there must be a solemn meeting in the meeting-room, and all hearts must be deeply searched in a most earnest effort to reach mental accord and the right decision. The meeting was silent. It lasted for many hours. When it was over I learned that all, including Ng- Gunko and John himself, had accepted with conviction and with gladness the views of Shên Kuo. The weeks passed. Telepathic observation informed us that, when the second cruiser had left us, considerable amnesia and other mental derangements had occurred among those of the crew who had landed on the island. The Commander’s report was incoherent and incredible. Like the first Commander, he was disgraced. The Foreign Offices of the world, through their secret services, ferreted out as much as possible of this latest incident. They did not form anything like an accurate idea of events, but they procured shreds of truth embroidered with fantastic exaggeration. There was a general feeling that something more was at stake than a diplomatic coup, and the discomfiture of the British Government. Something weird, something quite beyond reckoning was going on on that remote island. Three ships had been sent away with their crews in mental
8.3 Both commitments: the eugenic thread beside the worship
Here the comparison must carry its hardest truth, because a monograph on Stapledon-against-the-breeders could easily curdle into hagiography, and the record forbids it. He kept both commitments. The flagship’s §3.11 holds the full ledger and this monograph will not duplicate it, but the comparison is dishonest without its headline: the man who inverted the superman tradition’s religion never renounced its technique. The 1908 essay out-Galtoned Galton with a legislation clause (§2.3). The 1931 broadcast hoped “that the creation of such a race will become in time the constant policy of all mankind.” The 1929 Ethics rates the under-achiever “a cripple, an unfortunate, and a scourge to society”; the 1942 pamphlet, doctrine-free and breeding-free, still ranks “superiors in the vast hierarchy of the spirit” and rates capacity from “above the moron level” — while defining humanity, in the same breath, as “being incipiently superhuman.” And in 1948, two years before his death, Interplanetary Man? still contemplates “drastic eugenical operation on the existing human form.” What the 1934 lecture disavows is the worship of supermen — the bred god, the Race deity — not the ambition to remake human stock; the two run side by side to the end, fenced by the correctives that same section documents beside them (the consent margin of sheet 11 — “none may sacrifice another against his will” — the anti-herd arguments, the anti-imperial program, the anti-Aryan wartime platform).
rare pieces (1908–49) ↗ · ¶ 95 — quoted passage in context
The general direction of desirable changes I would summarise in this way. They should afford me a richer, wider, deeper, more subtle, more accurate experience of this amazing world. Further, they should help me to see more clearly what is really desirable. Finally, they should enable me, in every kind of situation, to take all relevant facts into account, and behave always with supreme tact, intelligence, insight, foresight, so that always the best possible results may follow. That I should be remade, or you, is impossible. But do we not desire that a race of beings far happier and more vital than ourselves should some day occur? I for one hope that the creation of such a race will become in time the constant policy of all mankind. And though this radical remaking of man is not practical politics to-day, already some of the preliminary steps need no longer be dismissed as fantasy.
A Modern Theory of Ethics (1929) ↗ · ¶ 231 — quoted passage in context
ESSENTIALS OF THE CONCRETE IDEAL 221 potentiality of the real as it now is, by the character and potentiality of a certain particular, though that particular be the universe. The ideal is that ‘is particular universe, that happens to exist, should be fulfilled as richly as pos- sible, not (per impossibile) that this universe should be wiped out and another of a more elegant kind substituted for it. The practical ideal, the only ideal which we can envisage, is human ; and being human it is social. But its sociality is derivative, not essential. Essentially the practical ideal is the fulfilment of human mental capacity, and its exercise upon the richest possible objective content; but this fulfilment quite certainly entails sociality. The practical ideal, in fact, is that the human race should achieve the highest possible mentality and the richest possible culture. And this mentality and culture must be particularized in just so many individuals, neither more nor less, as are necessary for its perfection. But so long as there is an excess of individuals (if there be), they also have their rights. The immediate ideal must not simply neglect them, even for the sake of the ultimate mental perfection of the race. But the more remote ideal is that there should be just so many individuals as are needed to perfect human capacity and culture. Further, lest some individuals should lack fulfilment, it is demanded in the ideal that every one should be, not merely fulfilled up to the limit of his capacity, but of the very highest capacity. For a man who achieves less than full humanity is so far a cripple, an unfortunate, and a scourge to society.. Thus it is demanded that each individual should know all that is known and will the good. If this encyclopaedic know- ledge seems preposterous, let us say that each should know at least schematically all that is known, so that he may will the good. For if any were to know less than the schema of all knowledge, or will less than the ideal, the harmony of all would be destroyed, and the activity of the whole would be discrepant with itself, and the pro- gressive discovery and achievement of yet higher ideals would be hindered. But if each is to know all and will
Beyond the “Isms” (1942) ↗ · ¶ 304 · ¶ 199 · ¶ 195 — quoted passages in context
Toward those whom one recognizes as superiors in the vast hierarchy of the spirit one may feel, in virtue of the unity of the spirit, admiration untinged by jealousy. For their achievement is the spirit's achievement in them ; and in oneself lesser things are achieved by the same spirit. The left hand need not be jealous of the right hand's cunning.
For all-round personal well-being a man needs activity upon all these three planes, the sub-human, the average human, the incipiently super-human, if I may so call it. Probably all of us who are above the moron level have some latent capacity for the incipiently super-human activities.
What do we need for personal well-being? Since we are all members of one biological species, well-being is at bottom the same for us all. But since our species is human, and our fundamental identity blossoms out into rich diversity of individual character, well-being varies greatly from individual to individual. What is food for one is poison for another. It is the privilege of the human species that its individuals differ from one another far more than the individuals of any other natural species, in native equipment and still more in acquired character. And it is the glory of man at his best that the immense differences between human beings may lead not to mere hate and conflict but to mutual enrichment and mutual responsibility. And this is the way to the spirit. Indeed, since to be human involves being incipiently superhuman, all of us are alike in that we need for true well-being to be sensitive to the spirit and to behave according to the spirit, so far as in us lies.
Interplanetary Man? (1948) ↗ · ¶ 15 — quoted passage in context
indeed, permanent shade was maintained by a cloud-blanket over the whole planet. There would certainly be a tendency for a large proportion of the planet’s water to remain permanently suspended in the atmosphere. On the outer planets, eugenics would have to play a major part. Even if the problems of the atmosphere and the extreme cold could be solved, there would be very great difficulties to face. It would be necessary to create a specially adapted human species of very small stature to cope with the excess of gravitation. This might well involve a serious reduction in the size of the cerebral cortices, with a consequent reduction of intelligence. For intelligence seems to depend on the actual number of top-level cells in the nervous system; or, as it were, on the complexity of the telephone exchange. Thus the attainment of human intelligence in a very small mammal would be impossible, unless some way could be found for greatly reducing the size of the individual cells and the thickness of the fibres without impairing efficiency. There is one other conceivable way out of the difficulty. By very drastic eugenical operation on the existing human form, it might be possible to enable the present human brain to be supported, in spite of excessive gravitation, by throwing man into the quadruped position, greatly strengthening the four legs, and at the same time pushing the head far backwards so as to distribute its weight evenly between the fore and hind legs. But what of the problem of providing hands? The fore-limbs would be fully occupied and unavailable for manipulation. My only suggestion is that the nose might be greatly elongated into a trunk, equipped with delicate grasping instruments like fingers. It would probably be desirable to have two trunks, if not three. The eyes, by the way, would have to be projected well forward from the thrown-back brain-pan, otherwise Homo Jovianus would not be able to see where he was stepping.
This is not a peripheral embarrassment; it is load-bearing for the comparison, in two directions. First, it locates Stapledon inside his period: he is not the anti-Galton, he is a Galton-formed progressive who relocated the divine. When §9’s moderns sever themselves from eugenics (Bostrom’s “centrally planned efforts to create better people” disavowed), they are renouncing something Stapledon never fully renounced — on that one axis the 2003 movement is farther from the 1930s than he was. Second, and less comfortably for the moderns: the fact that he could hold breeding-as-policy and worship-of-the-Other simultaneously proves the two questions are independent — which means dropping the eugenics (as the moderns rightly did) never required dropping the worship (which they also did, §9). The inversion and the ledger are separable, and the record shows a man who kept the wrong half of the period’s package by our lights and the half nobody else kept by his own.
Bostrom, “Transhumanist Values” (2003) ↗ · ¶ 35 — quoted passage in context
[…] transhumanists typically place emphasis on individual freedom and individual choice in the area of enhancement technologies. Humans differ widely in their conceptions of what their own perfection or improvement would consist in. Some want to develop in one direction, others in different directions, and some prefer to stay the way they are. It would be morally unacceptable for anybody to impose a single standard to which we would all have to conform. People should have the right to choose which enhancement technologies, if any, they want to use. In cases where individual choices impact substantially on other people, this general principle may need to be restricted, but the mere fact that somebody may be disgusted or morally affronted by somebody else’s using technology to modify herself would not normally be a legitimate ground for coercive interference. Furthermore, the poor track record of centrally planned efforts to create better people (e.g., the eugenics movement and Soviet totalitarianism) shows that we need to be wary of collective decision-making in the field of human modification. Another transhumanist priority is to put ourselves in a better position to make wise choices about where we are going. We will need all the wisdom we can get when negotiating the posthuman transition. Transhumanists place a high value on improvements in our individual and collective powers of understanding and in our ability to implement responsible decisions. Collectively, we might get smarter and more informed through such means as scientific research, public debate and open discussion of the future, information markets,8 and collaborative information filtering.9 On an individual level, we can benefit from education, critical thinking, open-mindedness, study techniques, information technology, and perhaps memory or attention enhancing […]
8.4 Five answers to the third world
One sheet of the 1934 manuscript turns out to be the axis on which this whole shelf rotates: sheet 10’s third world — “a brotherhood of equal supermen — impossible, ∵ capacities vary in rank.” Nearly every text this monograph has read gives its own answer to that world, and lining them up is the tidiest summary the comparison affords. Wells (1923) builds it, by breeding the lower ranks out of existence — the impossible brotherhood achieved by subtraction. Haldane (1927) collectivizes it — no brotherhood of equals but a super-organism in which the question of rank dissolves along with the individual. Teilhard (1938–40) universalizes it — the entry into the super-human “not thrown open to a few of the privileged,” only to “an advance of all together”: equality guaranteed by making the destination collective. Ettinger (1972) markets it — “there may be many limited supermen… Still, at least two factors should tend to save the situation: heterogeneity and upward mobility”: rank admitted and dissolved by everyone upgrading on their own schedule. Stapledon (1934) alone keeps the ranked world and refuses to deify anyone in it: the fourth world’s hierarchy for the human question, the salute for the religious one — no member of the hierarchy, however high, being anything but a fellow-creature under the same Other. Four of the five answers solve the equality problem by adjusting the supermen. The fifth dissolves it by observing that no superman, equal or not, was ever the proper object of the feeling the word “superhumanism” names. Whether that is profundity or evasion is exactly the question a reader should leave this monograph holding; the streams’ own texts, cited above, are the evidence on both sides.
Ettinger, Man into Superman (1972) ↗ · ¶ 644 — quoted passage in context
There will still be problems, but to some extent they may create their own solutions. If a new variety is really a superman in all respects, he will realize, far better than we, the error in mistreating inferiors and the folly of boastfulness or arrogance. But there may be many limited supermen, especially in the near future, and they will not necessarily have balanced judgement; some of them may be only strong, and not very sympathetic or wise. Still, at least two factors should tend to save the situation: heterogeneity and upward mobility.
9. The half-memory: Huxley, Ettinger, Bostrom
The last stream runs forward from the shelf, and its tier must be split to be honest. At two of its three stations — 1972 and 2005 — the record is documented reception of Stapledon, by the tradition that forgot what he was for; at the first — 1957 — it is a lexical junction and a comparison only, for Huxley’s essay does not mention him. Three stations, then: at the two receiving ones the record is double — the futurist is claimed, the worshipper is invisible — and the first supplies the word the claiming would later travel under. The evidence on every half is verified, much of it by counting zeros.
9.1 Huxley, 1957: “man remaining man”
When Julian Huxley — the evolutionary humanist of the 1946 sheets, the man who quoted Otto’s tremendum at length in 1927 and would sponsor Teilhard into English in 1959 (§7.4) — needed “a name for this new belief,” he coined the modern word: “Perhaps transhumanism will serve: man remaining man, but transcending himself, by realizing new possibilities of and for his human nature.” The held essay shows the coinage’s content is not the upgrade eschatology the word later attached to but the fulfilment-of-capacity program itself — “the fullest realization of man’s possibilities, whether by the individual, by the community, or by the species,” man “appointed managing director of the biggest business of all, the business of evolution” — evolutionary humanism under a new flag, ending “I believe in transhumanism.” For this monograph the coinage is the hinge between the shelf and the moderns, and its phrase deserves italics: man remaining man. That is the precise clause the 1934 lecture spent an evening arguing against — not because man should become superman (the whole point of §8 is that the Other is no man at all), but because a transcendence in which man remains both agent and beneficiary is, in the lecture’s terms, the mutual improvement society consecrated. The word that would carry the next century’s superhumanism was minted, by a man who knew the numinous literature intimately, to name the position Stapledon had judged not enough — and the judgment’s author went unmentioned. (The tier, stated plainly: this station is comparison and lexical junction, not documented reception — the essay names almost nobody and Stapledon not at all, so no slight is documented or implied; Huxley’s documented engagements sit elsewhere on this shelf, in §7.1’s 1927 Otto quotations and §7.4’s 1959 Teilhard sponsorship. The point is lexical: the new word’s DNA is humanist, and it never carried a worship gene.)
Huxley, “Transhumanism” (1957) ↗ · ¶ 17 · ¶ 7 · ¶ 6 · ¶ 18 — quoted passages in context
The human species can, if it wishes, transcend itself—not just sporadically, an individual here in one way, an individual there in another way, but in its entirety, as humanity. We need a name for this new belief. Perhaps *transhumanism* will serve: man remaining man, but transcending himself, by realizing new possibilities of and for his human nature.
What the job really boils down to is this—the fullest realization of man’s possibilities, whether by the individual, by the community, or by the species in its processional adventure along the corridors of time.
It is as if man had been suddenly appointed managing director of the biggest business of all, the business of evolution—appointed without being asked if he wanted it, and without proper warning and preparation. What is more, he can’t refuse the job. Whether he wants to or not, whether he is conscious of what he is doing or not, he is in point of fact determining the future direction of evolution on this earth. That is his inescapable destiny, and the sooner he realizes it and starts believing in it, the better for all concerned.
“I believe in transhumanism”: once there are enough people who can truly say that, the human species will be on the threshold of a new kind of existence, as different from ours as ours is from that of Pekin man. It will at last be consciously fulfilling its real destiny.
9.2 Ettinger, 1972: the crown and the sneer
By 1972 the word’s descendants were already functioning as movement vocabulary. R. C. W. Ettinger’s Man into Superman opens in the first person — “By working hard and saving my money, I intend to become an immortal superman,” those who settle for mortality and humanity “just do not understand their predicament or their opportunity, how lowly they are” — and names the vanguard: “the dozen or so chrononauts now lying frozen in their voyage through time,” some having “already decided to try for immortality and transhumanity.” “Transhumanity,” 1972: Huxley’s coinage at work two decades before the organized movement. This is the upgrade pole at maximum brashness — the superman as a savings plan — and it is also, remarkably, the fullest documented reception of Stapledon anywhere in the tradition. Chapter 3 is titled “From Gilgamesh to Olaf Stapledon”: the entire literary prehistory of the superman runs from the oldest epic to Stapledon as terminus. The crown is explicit — “The epics of Olaf Stapledon span galaxies of space and giga-years of time, his novels comprising ‘future histories’ that are in some ways unmatched in scope”; “he may have contributed more than any other single writer to concepts of superman” — and Ettinger has genuinely read him: his quotations verify into three held Stapledon texts, and his Wells pages quote Star-Begotten’s “sculptor’s dog” exchange verbatim from the very book in which Wells names Stapledon (§6.1) — without ever noticing the naming.
Ettinger, Man into Superman (1972) ↗ · ¶ 31 · ¶ 39 · ¶ 122 · ¶ 182 · ¶ 183 · ¶ 168 — quoted passages in context
By working hard and saving my money, I intend to become an immortal superman. Naturally, many still question the realism and propriety of such a goal; they see this kind of ambition as both foolish and vulgar. I hope to show that those who are willing to settle for mortality and humanity just do not understand their predicament or their opportunity, how lowly they are and how exalted they may become.
Some have already decided to try for immortality and transhumanity, including the dozen or so chrononauts now lying frozen in their voyage through time. But to most onlookers their motives remain somewhat obscure and their vision unclear. What do they love in life, that they cling to it so tenaciously? What marvelous future do they foresee, that they are determined to experience it? In that far season, what strange flowerings do they imagine, that they tug so insistently at Heinlein’s “door into summer”? And to what mighty works, what soaring projects, do they imagine they can contribute?
From Gilgamesh to Olaf Stapledon
*The Epic of Gilgamesh* comes to us from the relatively recent past, and while some of its concepts are on a scale of cosmic grandeur, it is generally earthbound. The epics of Olaf Stapledon span galaxies of space and giga-years of time, his novels comprising “future histories” that are in some ways unmatched in scope.
Written from 1930 to 1950, Stapledon’s efforts by the calendar belong to the modern era of science fiction (dating from the old *Amazing Stories* magazine of Hugo Gernsback, beginning in 1926), but Stapledon does not convey a modern flavor; there is something distinctly quaint and old-fashioned in his writing, in both the approach and the particulars. None the less, he may have contributed more than any other single writer to concepts of superman.
“Let us admit,” said Keppel, “that this is attempting the most impossible of tasks. The hypothesis is that these coming supermen are stronger-witted, better-balanced, and altogether wiser than we are. How can we begin to put our imaginations into their minds and figure out what they will think or do? If our intelligences were as tall as theirs, we should be making their world now . . . You make me feel like the sculptor’s dog trying to explain his master’s life to the musician’s cat.”178
Wells, Star Begotten (1937) ↗ · ¶ 692 — quoted passage in context
'You make me feel like the sculptor's dog trying to explain his master's life to the musician's cat.'
And the crown comes fused to the sneer, in the same three pages: “There is something distinctly quaint and old-fashioned in his writing”; and the verdict entire — “In general, Stapledon is very weak in technology, gadgetry, biology, and psychology. As a writer, he can neither plot nor characterize. In short, he is little more than an amateur philosopher. Yet he grappled manfully with themes that intimidated those better qualified… If there is something slightly Quixotic about the mismatching of his goals and capabilities, still he deserves our respect and gratitude.” The engineer grades the mystic on gadgetry, finds him weak, and keeps the scope — even the deep time is dismissed as an error of pessimism (“we are on the verge of a sharp discontinuity in history”). But the load-bearing evidence for this monograph is lexical and doctrinal. The man Ettinger crowns as the summit of superman literature had coined a name for the superman’s philosophy — and the 1972 program never uses it: “superhumanism” scores zero hits in the held text (its own terms are “immortalism,” “transhumanity,” “the new meliorism”). And where the worship question surfaces, Ettinger rejects the frame explicitly: criticizing a fellow immortalist’s talk of becoming “gods,” he objects that “This phrasing brings unpleasant and inaccurate connotations, such as a desire for worshippers and a static utopia.” There is the flagship’s worship/upgrade axis stated from the upgrade side, with the word “worshippers” in it: to the upgrade tradition, worship is not even a temptation — it is a public-relations liability, something a superman would be embarrassed to want from others. That the salute is something one gives — that a superman might worship rather than be worshipped, which is the entire content of Odd John’s ending — is not so much rejected as never conceived. Humanism fares no better — “The Communist, and the humanist, may be thought ‘nobler’ than the Christian or Moslem (i.e., crazier) because they make their sacrifices without hope of personal reward in any afterlife” — and Nietzsche is disowned as the tradition’s Nazi liability (“became a patron saint of the Nazis”). Even the third-world problem returns (§8.4): “Could he tolerate a world full of peers?” — answered with heterogeneity and upward mobility. Ettinger, 1972, is the claiming caught in the act: the epics annexed as upgrade scripture by a man who intends to become the superman, written by a man whose supermen died saluting.
Ettinger, Man into Superman (1972) ↗ · ¶ 183 · ¶ 189 · ¶ 220 · ¶ 957 · ¶ 693 · ¶ 135 · ¶ 192 — quoted passages in context
Written from 1930 to 1950, Stapledon’s efforts by the calendar belong to the modern era of science fiction (dating from the old *Amazing Stories* magazine of Hugo Gernsback, beginning in 1926), but Stapledon does not convey a modern flavor; there is something distinctly quaint and old-fashioned in his writing, in both the approach and the particulars. None the less, he may have contributed more than any other single writer to concepts of superman.
In general, Stapledon is very weak in technology, gadgetry, biology, and psychology. As a writer, he can neither plot nor characterize. In short, he is little more than an amateur philosopher. Yet he grappled manfully with themes that intimidated those better qualified; he forged ahead where the professional hung back or turned aside. He insisted that there is a Big Picture, and he took it seriously. If there is something slightly Quixotic about the mismatching of his goals and capabilities, still he deserves our respect and gratitude.
Natural evolution, even assisted by eugenics (planned breeding), is generally slow. Stapledon imagined billions of years were required to produce his Last Men, and modern science-fiction writers blithely create galactic societies with only slightly modified people in them. But it is clear that genetic engineering will produce radical alterations in a very few centuries at most. Change will not be gradual, but explosive; we are on the verge of a sharp discontinuity in history.
Again, his phrasing of the goal seems ill chosen—to become "divine," "deities," "gods." This phrasing brings unpleasant and inaccurate connotations, such as a desire for worshippers and a static utopia. This last, especially, is astonishingly shallow and short-sighted.
The Communist, and the humanist, may be thought “nobler” than the Christian or Moslem (*i.e.*, crazier) because they make their sacrifices without hope of personal reward in any afterlife; they labor, and if need be suffer, merely for the “holy joy of doing good” for the community, or for posterity. The very purity of this dedication reveals its absurdity.
Friedrich Nietzsche was the man who popularized the term “superman” (*übermensch*), and who became a patron saint of the Nazis; he was a creature of many contradictions in his person and in his writing. It is as easy to demolish his illogic as to admire his literary bravura, but this is not our primary interest, which rather concerns any new or constructive ideas he may have had concerning the purpose of life and the quality of the superman.
Of Holmes' personality traits, the outstanding is vanity; he is always posturing and soliciting flattery, as Dr. Watson frankly concedes. In fact, we get the impression that Holmes has chosen his tawdry and ill-paying profession because it gives him endless opportunity to strut and to humiliate others, both colleagues and criminals. We may again dubiously reflect: Does the superman require a foil? If a legitimate foil (the criminal) were lacking, would he seek victims elsewhere? Could he tolerate a world full of peers?
9.3 Bostrom, 2003–2005: the genealogy with a hole in it
When the organized movement wrote its own history — Nick Bostrom’s “A History of Transhumanist Thought” (2005) — Stapledon entered the canon, twice in one paragraph: the post-Daedalus discussions include “the works of Olaf Stapledon, a philosopher and science fiction author,” and “Science fiction authors such as H. G. Wells and Stapledon got many people thinking about the future evolution of the human race.” The genealogy is the shelf of this monograph’s §5 — Haldane’s Daedalus setting off Bernal (named with his held book), Stapledon, Russell — and the coinage handoff is verified at both ends of the held corpus: the history quotes Huxley’s 1957 sentence verbatim (“man remaining man, but transcending himself”), attributing the first use to “Aldous Huxley’s brother, Julian Huxley,” the very passage held in the 1957 essay. Ettinger is placed as “continuing the tradition started by Haldane and Bernal”; Nietzsche is disavowed on the same grounds the tradition always disavows him (“What Nietzsche had in mind, however, was not technological transformation but a kind of soaring personal growth and cultural refinement in exceptional individuals”); and the eugenic ancestry is formally severed — “Both sides condemn the racist and coercive state-sponsored eugenics programs of the 20th century,” as the companion paper’s values disavow “centrally planned efforts to create better people.” The movement’s self-definition completes the picture: “Transhumanism is a loosely defined movement,” human nature “a work-in-progress, a half-baked beginning that we can learn to remold in desirable ways”; the hope is that “we shall eventually manage to become posthuman”; the core value’s full realization “requires that, ideally, everybody should have the opportunity to become posthuman” — the third world of sheet 10, solved Ettinger’s way, universalized. And its paternity is claimed in both founding documents at once: “Transhumanism has roots in secular humanist thinking”; “Transhumanism has roots in rational humanism.” The movement descends, by its own account, from precisely the position the 1934 lecture judged not enough.
Bostrom, “History of Transhumanist Thought” (2005) ↗ · ¶ 26 · ¶ 32 · ¶ 31 · ¶ 58 · ¶ 22 · ¶ 105 · ¶ 12 — quoted passages in context
Haldane’s essay became a bestseller and set off a chain of future‐oriented discussions, including The World, the Flesh and the Devil, by J. D. Bernal (1929) 12 , which speculated about space colonization and bionic implants as well as mental improvements arising from advanced social science and psychology; the works of Olaf Stapledon, a philosopher and science fiction author; and the essay “Icarus: the Future of Science” (1924) by Bertrand Russell. 13 Russell took a more pessimistic view, arguing that without more kindliness in the world, technological power would mainly serve to increase our ability to harm one another. Science fiction authors such as H. G. Wells and Stapledon got many people thinking about the future evolution of the human race.
The human species can, if it wishes, transcend itself – not just sporadically, an individual here in one way, an individual there in another way – but in its entirety, as humanity. We need a name for this new belief. Perhaps transhumanism will serve: man remaining man, but transcending himself, by realizing new possibilities of and for his human nature. 17
The word “transhumanism” appears to have been first used by Aldous Huxley’s brother, Julian Huxley, a distinguished biologist (who was also the first director‐general of UNESCO and a founder of the World Wildlife Fund). In New Bottles for New Wine (1957), he wrote:
In a later work, Man into Superman (1972), Ettinger discussed a number of conceivable technological improvements of the human organism, continuing the tradition started by Haldane and Bernal. 34
What Nietzsche had in mind, however, was not technological transformation but a kind of soaring personal growth and cultural refinement in exceptional individuals (who he thought would have to overcome the life‐sapping “slave‐morality” of Christianity). Despite some surface‐level similarities with the Nietzschean vision, transhumanism – with its Enlightenment roots, its emphasis on individual liberties, and its humanistic concern for the welfare of all humans (and other sentient beings) – probably has as much or more in common with Nietzsche’s contemporary the English liberal thinker and utilitarian John Stuart Mill.
There are other commonalities between bioconservatives and transhumanists. Both agree that we face a realistic prospect that technology could be used to substantially transform the human condition in this century. Both agree that this imposes an obligation on the current generation to think hard about the practical and ethical implications. Both are concerned with medical risks of side‐effects, of course, although bioconservatives are more worried that the technology might succeed than that it might fail. Both camps agree that technology in general and medicine in particular have a legitimate role to play, although bioconservatives tend to oppose many uses of medicine that go beyond therapy to enhancement. Both sides condemn the racist and coercive state‐sponsored eugenics programs of the 20th century. Bioconservatives draw attention to the possibility that subtle human values could be eroded by technological advances, and transhumanists should perhaps learn to be more sensitive to these concerns. On the other hand, transhumanists emphasize the enormous potential for genuine improvements in human well‐being and human flourishing that are attainable only via technological transformation, and bioconservatives could try to be more appreciative of the possibility that we could realize great values by venturing beyond our current biological limitations. 77
The Age of Enlightenment is often said to have started with the publication of Francis Bacon’s Novum Organum , “the new tool” (1620), which proposes a scientific methodology based on empirical investigation rather than a‐priori reasoning. 4 Bacon advocated the project of “effecting all things possible,” by which he meant using science to achieve mastery over nature in order to improve the living condition of human beings. The heritage from the Renaissance combines with the influence of Isaac Newton, Thomas Hobbes, John Locke, Immanuel Kant, the Marquis de Condorcet, and others to form the basis for rational humanism, which emphasizes empirical science and critical reason – rather than revelation and religious authority – as ways of learning about the natural world and our place within it and of providing a grounding for morality. Transhumanism has roots in rational humanism.
Bostrom, “Transhumanist Values” (2003) ↗ · ¶ 5 · ¶ 32 · ¶ 6 — quoted passages in context
Transhumanism is a loosely defined movement that has developed gradually over the past two decades.1 It promotes an interdisciplinary approach to understanding and evaluating the opportunities for enhancing the human condition and the human organism opened up by the advancement of technology. Attention is given to both present technologies, like genetic engineering and information technology, and anticipated future ones, such as molecular nanotechnology and artificial intelligence. The enhancement options being discussed include radical extension of human health-span, eradication of disease, elimination of unnecessary suffering, and augmentation of human intellectual, physical, and emotional capacities. Other transhumanist themes include space colonization and the possibility of creating superintelligent machines, along with other potential developments that could profoundly alter the human condition. The ambit is not limited to gadgets and medicine, but encompasses also economic, social and institutional designs, cultural development, and psychological skills and techniques. Transhumanists view human nature as a work-in-progress, a half-baked beginning that we can learn to remold in desirable ways. Current humanity need not be the endpoint of evolution. Transhumanists hope that by responsible use of science, technology, and other rational means we shall eventually manage to become posthuman, beings with vastly greater capacities than present human beings have. Some transhumanists take active steps to increase the probability that they personally will survive long enough to become posthuman, for example by choosing a healthy lifestyle or by making provisions for having themselves cryonically suspended in case of de-animation.2 In contrast to many other ethical outlooks, which in practice often reflect a reactionary attitude to new technologies, the transhumanist view is guided by an evolving vision to take a more proactive approach to technology policy. This vision, in broad strokes, is to create the opportunity to live much longer and healthier lives, to enhance our memory and other intellectual faculties, to refine our emotional experiences and increase our subjective sense of well-being, and generally to achieve a greater degree of control over our own lives. This affirmation […]
It is not enough that the posthuman realm be explored by someone. The full realization of the core transhumanist value requires that, ideally, everybody should have the opportunity to become posthuman. It would be sub-optimal if the opportunity to become posthuman were restricted to a tiny elite.
Transhumanism has roots in secular humanist thinking, yet is more radical in that it promotes not only traditional means of improving human nature, such as education and cultural refinement, but also direct application of medicine and technology to overcome some of our basic biological limits.
Now the hole, verified by count. In the history: “superhumanism,” 0 — the string “superhuman” occurs once, inside Vinge’s quoted 1993 prediction of the technological “means to create superhuman intelligence.” “Last and First Men,” 0. “Star Maker,” 0. “Odd John,” 0. “1934,” 0. Across both held Bostrom texts: “worship,” 0 + 0; “reverence,” 0 + 0. The one occurrence of “awe” is self-directed — civilization’s growth “is appropriately regarded with awe, as humanity’s most glorious achievement.” Where the history brushes religion-shaped aspiration (Teilhard’s noosphere, Tipler’s Omega), it expels it: such ideas might appeal to “those who fancy a marriage between mysticism and science,” but “they have not caught on either among transhumanists.” The nearest approach to the Other pole in the whole modern corpus is one sentence of genuine aspiration — “there is at least a serious possibility of there being something very precious outside the human sphere. This constitutes a reason to pursue the means that will let us go there and find out” — and its grammar gives the game away: the precious thing outside the human sphere is a region to enter and become, not an Other to salute. Even the movement’s widest moral circle — “the well-being of all sentience” — widens sideways, never up. Stapledon stands in transhumanism’s official genealogy untitled, unquoted, and functionally re-described: a philosopher and science-fiction author who “got many people thinking.” The movement claims the futurist and has no slot in its ontology for the worshipper.
Bostrom, “History of Transhumanist Thought” (2005) ↗ · ¶ 43 · ¶ 45 — quoted passages in context
Within thirty years, we will have the technological means to create superhuman intelligence. Shortly after, the human era will be ended. 24
The singularity idea also comes in a somewhat different eschatological version, which traces its lineage to the writings of Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, a paleontologist and Jesuit theologian who saw an evolutionary telos in the development of an encompassing noosphere (a global consciousness) – via physicist Frank Tipler, who argued that advanced civilizations might come to have a defining influence on the future evolution of the cosmos, and, in the final moments of the Big Crunch, might manage to extract an infinite number of computations by harnessing the sheer energy of the collapsing matter. 25 26 However, while these ideas might appeal to those who fancy a marriage between mysticism and science, they have not caught on either among transhumanists or the larger scientific community. Current cosmological theories indicate that the universe will continue to expand forever (falsifying Tipler’s prediction). But the more general point that the transhumanist might make in this context is that we need to learn to think about “big‐picture questions” without resorting to wishful thinking or mysticism. Big‐picture questions, including ones about our place in the world and the long‐term fate of intelligent life are part of transhumanism; however, these questions should be addressed in a sober, disinterested way, using critical reason and our best available scientific evidence. One reason why such questions are of transhumanist interest is that their answers might affect what outcomes we should expect from our own technological development, and therefore – indirectly – what policies it makes sense for humanity to pursue.
Bostrom, “Transhumanist Values” (2003) ↗ · ¶ 30 · ¶ 13 · ¶ 35 — quoted passages in context
That technological progress is generally desirable from a transhumanist point of view is also self-evident. Many of our biological shortcomings (aging, disease, feeble memories and intellects, a limited emotional repertoire, and inadequate capacity for sustained well-being) are difficult to overcome, and to do so will require advanced tools. Developing these tools is a gargantuan challenge for the collective problem-solving capacities of our species. Since technological progress is closely linked to economic development, economic growth—or more precisely, productivity growth—can in some cases serve as a proxy for technological progress. (Productivity growth is, of course, only an imperfect measure of the relevant form of technological progress, which, in turn, is an imperfect measure of overall improvement, since it omits such factors as equity of distribution, ecological diversity, and quality of human relationships.) The history of economic and technological development, and the concomitant growth of civilization, is appropriately regarded with awe, as humanity’s most glorious achievement. Thanks to the gradual accumulation of improvements over the past several thousand years, large portions of humanity have been freed from illiteracy, life-expectancies of twenty years, alarming infant-mortality rates, horrible diseases endured without palliatives, and periodic starvation and water shortages. Technology, in this context, is not just gadgets but includes all instrumentally useful objects and systems that have been deliberately created. This broad definition encompasses practices and institutions, such as double-entry accounting, scientific peer-review, legal systems, and the applied sciences.
Because of the precarious conditions in which our Pleistocene ancestors lived, the human lifespan has evolved to be a paltry seven or eight decades. This is, from many perspectives, a rather short period of time. Even tortoises do better than that. We do not have to use geological or cosmological comparisons to highlight the meagerness of our allotted time budgets. To get a sense that we might be missing out on something important by our tendency to die early, we only have to bring to mind some of the worthwhile things that we could have done or attempted to do if we had had more time. For gardeners, educators, scholars, artists, city planners, and those who simply relish observing and participating in the cultural or political variety shows of life, three scores and ten is often insufficient for seeing even one major project through to completion, let alone for undertaking many such projects in sequence. Human character development is also cut short by aging and death. Imagine what might have become of a Beethoven or a Goethe if they had still been with us today. Maybe they would have developed into rigid old grumps interested exclusively in conversing about the achievements of their youth. But maybe, if they had continued to enjoy health and youthful vitality, they would have continued to grow as men and artists, to reach levels of maturity that we can barely imagine. We certainly cannot rule that out based on what we know today. Therefore, there is at least a serious possibility of there being something very precious outside the human sphere. This constitutes a reason to pursue the means that will let us go there and find out.
[…] counteract various existential risks. More studies on such risks would help us get a better understanding of the long-term threats to human flourishing and of what can be done to reduce them. Since technological development is necessary to realize the transhumanist vision, entrepreneurship, science, and the engineering spirit are to be promoted. More generally, transhumanists favor a pragmatic attitude and a constructive, problem-solving approach to challenges, preferring methods that experience tells us give good results. They think it better to take the initiative to “do something about it” rather than sit around complaining. This is one sense in which transhumanism is optimistic. (It is not optimistic in the sense of advocating an inflated belief in the probability of success or in the Panglossian sense of inventing excuses for the shortcomings of the status quo.) Transhumanism advocates the well-being of all sentience, whether in artificial intellects, humans, and non-human animals (including extraterrestrial species, if there are any). Racism, sexism, speciesism, belligerent nationalism, and religious intolerance are unacceptable. In addition to the usual grounds for deeming such practices objectionable, there is also a specifically transhumanist motivation for this. In order to prepare for a time when the human species may start branching out in various directions, we need to start now to strongly encourage the development of moral sentiments that are broad enough to encompass within the sphere of moral concern sentiences that are constituted differently from ourselves. Finally, transhumanism stresses the moral urgency of saving lives, or, more precisely, of preventing involuntary deaths among people whose lives are worth living. In the developed world, aging is currently the number one killer. Aging […]
9.4 What the forgetting loses
Say it first with the tiers on: nothing here documents a rejection. Bostrom read no lecture manuscript (nobody could; it sat uncatalogued in a Liverpool archive); Ettinger read the epics as an engineer reads them; Huxley named his own position, not Stapledon’s. The forgetting is an omission with structural causes, not a motive — the worship half of Stapledon’s thought lived in a lecture hall in 1934, in a Pelican syllabus, in a sixpenny war pamphlet, in the last pages of novels the tradition read for their gadgets. But the omission has a content, and this monograph can state it exactly, because §§2–8 measured it.
What the upgrade tradition lost with the worshipper — the tradition as its held founding documents show it, no wider — is not piety, which it never wanted, but three working parts of a complete position. First, an object that survives defeat. The founding documents are careful about what failure means: setbacks are expected on any path, “just as they are if the transhumanist project is not pursued,” and the one absolute loss is existential — “one kind of catastrophe that must be avoided at any cost,” because “if we go extinct or permanently destroy our potential to develop further, then the transhumanist core value will not be realized.” Project failure, then, is survivable in Bostrom’s own terms; what nothing in the held modern corpus names is a value that would still stand on the far side of the species’ extinction — every good in it is immanent to human, sentient or posthuman flourishing. The 1934 position keeps the whole upgrade agenda (§8.3 shows it kept too much of it) and adds exactly that missing kind of value, one that not even the species’ final defeat can cancel: the Last Men, out of time and out of options, end in praise — “Great are the stars, and man is of no account to them… But one thing is certain. Man himself, at the very least, is music, a brave theme that makes music also of its vast accompaniment” (the held text’s own cadence). A tradition whose goods all live inside the species’ career has, at the point of final defeat, nothing left to do; the salute is precisely something left to do. Second, a discipline against self-congratulation. The lecture’s charge against the best humanism — a “mutual improvement and admiration society” — lands harder on a movement whose one recorded awe is for “humanity’s most glorious achievement”; the Other was, among other things, the instrument by which Stapledon kept his own futurism from becoming self-worship, and the sixteen-year record of §8.2 shows the instrument working. Third, an honest place for the dread. The moderns inherited the dread too — it reappears in their existential-risk literature with the theological voltage inverted, catastrophe where the tremendum stood — but stripped of any posture toward it except prevention. Stapledon’s position held that some of what confronts us is not a problem to be solved but a majesty to be faced, and that a species which can no longer tell the two apart has lost an organ of perception, not gained a rigour. Whether he was right is not a question this project’s methods can answer. What the record answers is narrower and firmer: on this shelf — and §10 says plainly that the shelf is no census — the twentieth century shows exactly one thinker who stood inside the superman tradition — bred by Galton’s heirs, seeded by Haldane, corresponding with Wells, crowned later by its own chroniclers — and re-aimed its whole devotional energy at something no program could ever produce. The tradition’s held documents kept his scope and dropped his object. The word he raised at South Place in 1934 — superhumanism, on a platform whose own record had used the adjective only for the enemy — is now nobody’s word at all; which may be the cleanest measure of how alone the position was, and remains.
Bostrom, “Transhumanist Values” (2003) ↗ · ¶ 28 — quoted passage in context
While disasters and setbacks are inevitable in the implementation of the transhumanist project (just as they are if the transhumanist project is not pursued), there is one kind of catastrophe that must be avoided at any cost: Existential risk—one where an adverse outcome would either annihilate Earthoriginating intelligent life or permanently and drastically curtail its potential.6 Several recent discussions have argued that the combined probability of the existential risks is very substantial.7 The relevance of the condition of existential safety to the transhumanist vision is obvious: if we go extinct or permanently destroy our potential to develop further, then the transhumanist core value will not be realized. Global security is the most fundamental and nonnegotiable requirement of the transhumanist project.
Last and First Men (1930) ↗ · ¶ 743 — quoted passage in context
Yet it has used him. And now it uses his destruction. Great, and terrible, and very beautiful is the Whole; and for man the best is that the Whole should use him. But does it really use him? Is the beauty of the Whole really enhanced by our agony? And is the Whole really beautiful? And what is beauty? Throughout all his existence man has been striving to hear the music of the spheres, and has seemed to himself once and again to catch some phrase of it, or even a hint of the whole form of it. Yet he can never be sure that he has truly heard it, nor even that there is any such perfect music at all to be heard. Inevitably so, for if it exists, it is not for him in his littleness. But one thing is certain. Man himself, at the very least, is music, a brave theme that makes music also of its vast accompaniment, its matrix of storms and stars. Man himself in his degree is eternally a beauty in the eternal form of things. It is very good to have been man. And so we may go forward together with laughter in our hearts, and peace, thankful for the past, and for our own courage. For we shall make after all a fair conclusion to this brief music that is man.
10. Tiers, witnesses, limits
The tier ledger, stream by stream. Galton: documented reception at the 1908 end only (the encomium, named; Crossley’s endnote) — the 1869/1883 books are comparison-tier inputs, no later contact documented. The ethical movement: documented context — Spiller’s history and Coit’s book document the platform and the word’s local career; neither text shows contact with Stapledon, and whether he knew that career is held open (§3.3), not claimed. Shaw and Bergson: documented interlocutors of the doctrine (the 1918–19 letters, the c. 1928 typescript, P&L’s named expositions and verdicts) — but the 1934 sheets name neither, and no document ties a specific Shaw or Bergson text to either lecture evening. Haldane: documented seed (Crossley’s finding, the annotated copy, Haldane’s own guess, the sheets’ later citations) — stance-contrast is ours. Bernal: documented antagonist (the dated Listener review, the dated wound, the sheets’ citation, Star Maker’s printed thanks). Wells: documented interlocutor (correspondence, societies, the 1928 verdict; Star Begotten names Stapledon) — but A Modern Utopia and Men Like Gods are comparison-tier as titles. Beresford: documented reception at full strength (preface acknowledgment, walked from biography to endnote to primary text). Nietzsche: one documented contact (the January 1918 letter, quoted whole above) — everything else is comparison, and the letter’s sifting tone is part of the evidence. Otto: documented reading in the lecture’s diary-year (Crossley’s endnote; the channel caveat lives in the flagship’s §2.6(b)). Alexander: documented engagement (the 1929 footnote; P&L’s exposition) — the 1934 sheets do not name him. Whitehead: documented engagement from 1939 (P&L quotes and declines) — nothing ties Process and Reality to 1934. Teilhard: independent convergence — no contact documented in either direction; the chronology (the Peking dateline, the posthumous publication) and the verified mutual silence strongly support independence without proving impossibility; the third-party bridges are documented. Huxley 1957: comparison and lexical junction — the essay does not mention Stapledon; Huxley’s documented engagements sit at §7.1 and §7.4. Ettinger 1972 / Bostrom 2003–05: documented reception of Stapledon by the later tradition (the chapter title and crown; the genealogy) — with the negative half of each claim verified by substring count in the held texts.
What this monograph deliberately does not claim. No coinage priority for “superhumanism” (unestablished; §1). No claim that Stapledon knew the word’s local career — the reversal on the South Place platform is documented, the knowledge is not, and §3.3 names the evidence that would settle it. No influence of Galton’s books on Stapledon, of Back to Methuselah as a title, of A Modern Utopia or Men Like Gods as titles, of Nietzsche beyond the 1918 sifting, of Process and Reality before 1939, of Teilhard ever, in either direction. No influence of Creative Evolution as a title on either lecture evening — the exclusion is scoped to the evenings deliberately, because §4.4 documents the book’s later textual use: Philosophy and Living (1939) built its Bergson exposition on it. No motive for the modern tradition’s omission of the worship half (omission documented; motive not in evidence). No verdict on whether the salute answers Russell’s Moloch objection (the flagship’s §4 stages that exchange and leaves it standing). And no complete census: the superman literatures of Germany, France and Russia, the Christian receptions of Teilhard, the pulp-magazine supermen of the 1930s, and the movement’s own later schisms are all outside the held corpus, and a comparison is only as wide as its shelf.
Witnesses. Every quotation from a held text above carries a build-time verified link into the source reader; every manuscript quotation follows the verified consensus transcription, with deck links to the sheet scans where the manuscript is discussed; the notes-embeds render the relevant sheets in place. The dossier tier behind this monograph — one verified dossier per shelf text, each quotation located before use (work/dossier_*.md) — is part of the project record, and the reader who wants any stream at full depth should go there next; the flagship, the 1946 monograph and the cross-lecture concordance own their own material, and this monograph has tried to borrow by link rather than by repetition.
Last word to the manuscript, because the whole comparison is finally about one sentence of it. The maker traditions of this shelf — breeders, vitalists, engineers, novelists, moderns — put a superman where God had been; the cosmic religious kept a God there. One lecturer put “an unspeakable Beauty, & Majesty” there instead, and gave man the office none of the makers’ programs ever contained: To worship — struck out once, and restored with a double line.